AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter
Instruction Manual V1.0
Publication Status: Standard
Product Edition: V1.0
All Copyright© reserved by Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric
Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without prior
notice. No part of this document may in any form or by any means
(electronic, mechanical, micro-coping, photocopying, recording or
otherwise) be reproduced, stored in a retrial system or transmitted
without prior written permission from Shanghai Sigriner STEP
Electric Co.,Ltd.
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Foreword
Thank you for purchasing AS180 series high performance vector inverter.
To ensure correct installation and use, please carefully read and understand the contents in the
instruction prior to use.
General Statement
During compilation and review, Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd (hereinafter referred to as STEP) has
checked the consistency between the contents in this document and hardware & software mentioned. But there may
be any negligence. We will regularly check the contents covered in this document, and provide the necessary
correction in the successive revision. Welcome to raise the suggestions for improvement.
Without prior written permission from Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd, no part of this document could
be reproduced, transmitted, copied or stored in a retrial system, or translated into any language in any form. The
violator will be liable for legal responsibility for the damage caused. Manual from STEP is printed on chloride-free
papers, which come from the sustainable forest. No chemical solvent is applied during printing and binding.
Reserve the right to modify the manual without prior notice.
is the trademark registered by STEP.
is the trademark registered by STEP.
Content description
Supplement and modification may be made to the content of this instruction, please visit our
company website regularly for update.
Website: www.stepelectric.com.
Contact address: if you have any doubt or problem during reading the manual, please contact us
by the address on the back cover of this document.
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
About Warranty
Warranty period
Warranty period of the product will be 18 months from delivery to your company or your
customer.
Warranty scope
Fault diagnosis
Principally, the initial fault diagnosis will be executed by the user.
But as required by the user, STEP or its service network may provide the paid
service.
At this time, if the fault is caused by STEP according to the result discussed by
both parties, then the service is free.
Fault repair
If it needs to repair or replace the product according to the fault appeared, STEP
may provide free onsite service. But the following will be paid services:

Fault is caused by the improper storage, use or design of the user and
its customer

Fault is caused by the change privately made by the user when STEP
doesn’t understand it;

Fault caused by the application of the product beyond its specification;

Fault caused by the natural disaster or fire;

Fault caused by any other reason other than STEP’s responsibility.
Beyond the guarantee responsibility
Any inconvenience brought to the user and its customer or damage to the product not from
STEP due to the fault of STEP product will be not within the guarantee scope of STEP.
STEP won’t undertake any responsibility for the associated loss.
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
CHAPTER 1 SAFETY NOTICE
CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION OF THE INVERTER
CHAPTER 4
WIRING OF THE INVERTER
CHAPTER 5 COMMISSIONING AND TEST RUN
CHAPTER 6 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETER TABLE
CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER DETAILS
CHAPTER 8 FAULT CHECK
CHAPTER 9
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
APPENDIX A INVERTER EMC INSTALLATION GUIDE
APPENDIX B STANDARD COMPATIBILITY
APPENDIX C MODBUS COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
APPENDIX D CUSTOMER COMPLAINT
APPENDIX E PRODUCT WARRANTY CARD
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Contents
CHAPTER 1 SAFETY NOTICE .............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 SAFETY-RELATED SIGN ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 SAFETY NOTES .................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.1 Usage........................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 Arrival Inspection ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.2.3 Transportation and Storage .......................................................................................................... 2
1.2.4 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.5 Electrical Wiring ......................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.6 Test Run ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.7 Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................................................ 5
1.2.8 Disposal Treatment...................................................................................................................... 6
1.2.9 Accord with Low Voltage Directive ............................................................................................ 6
1.2.10 Others ........................................................................................................................................ 6
1.3 MATTERS NEEDING ATTENTION .......................................................................................................... 7
1.3.1 Motor Insulation Inspection ........................................................................................................ 7
1.3.2 Thermal Protection of the Motor ................................................................................................. 7
1.3.3 Heating and Noise of the Motor .................................................................................................. 7
1.3.4 Notices for Input and Output ....................................................................................................... 7
1.3.5 Use Beyond the Rated Voltage Value .......................................................................................... 8
1.3.6 Lightning Surge Protection ......................................................................................................... 8
1.3.7 Leakage Protection ...................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.8 Use of Decreasing ....................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.9 Adaptive Motor ........................................................................................................................... 9
CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 11
2.1 NAMEPLATE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................ 11
2.1.1 Description of Inverter Nameplate ............................................................................................ 11
2.1.2 Product (order No.) Description ................................................................................................ 12
2.1.3 Description of Product Specification ........................................................................................ 12
2.2 TECHNICAL INDICATOR AND SPECIFICATION OF INVERTER ................................................................ 14
2.3 INSTALLATION SIMENSIONS OF THE INVERTER .................................................................................. 16
2.3.1 Product Appearance and Name of each Part ............................................................................. 16
2.3.2 Product Boundary Dimension and Mounting Dimension ......................................................... 18
2.3.3 Operator Dimension .................................................................................................................. 21
2.4 SELECTION OF BRAKING UNIT AND BRAKING RESISTOR ................................................................... 21
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION OF THE INVERTER ......................................................................... 25
3.1 INSTALLATION STEPS ......................................................................................................................... 25
3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................................................. 25
3.2.1 Installation Environment of the Product ................................................................................... 25
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
3.2.2 Installation Position and Space Requirement ............................................................................ 26
3.2.3 Inverter Installation ................................................................................................................... 28
3.3 INSTALLATION AND DISASSEMBLING OF THE OPERATOR AND PANEL ................................................. 29
3.3.1 Connect/Disconnect the Operator ............................................................................................. 29
3.3.2 Open/Close Wiring Cap ............................................................................................................ 29
3.3.3 Install and Disassemble Front Panel ......................................................................................... 30
CHAPTER 4
WIRING OF THE INVERTER ................................................................................. 33
4.1 CONNECT INVERTER TO PERIPHERALS ............................................................................................... 34
4.1.1 Connection Diagram between Inverter and Peripherals ............................................................ 34
4.1.2 Connect Inverter to Peripherals ................................................................................................. 35
4.2 WIRING OF INVERTER TERMINALS .................................................................................................... 47
4.2.1 Wiring Diagram of the Inverter Terminals ................................................................................ 47
4.2.2 Terminal wiring precaution ....................................................................................................... 49
4.3 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINAL WIRING .................................................................................................... 50
4.3.1 Line-up of Main Circuit Terminals............................................................................................ 50
4.3.2 Main Circuit Terminal Label and Function Specification ......................................................... 51
4.3.3 Main Circuit Wire Specification ............................................................................................... 51
4.3.4 Detailed Wiring Description for Terminals of the Main Loop .................................................. 54
4.4 ANTI-INTERFERENCE MEASURES....................................................................................................... 58
4.4.1 Connect Specific Noise Filter at Output .................................................................................... 58
4.4.2 Surge Suppressor at Output Side ............................................................................................... 58
4.4.3 Wiring Arrangement of the Main Loop ..................................................................................... 58
4.4.4 Proper Method against Interference .......................................................................................... 59
4.4.5 Relationship between Length of Wire and Carrier Frequency .................................................. 60
4.5 CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL WIRING .............................................................................................. 60
4.5.1 Line-up of Control Circuit Terminals ........................................................................................ 60
4.5.2 Control Circuit Terminal Label ................................................................................................. 61
4.5.3 Functional Description for Terminals of the Control Circuit .................................................... 61
4.5.4 Control Circuit Wire Specification ............................................................................................ 64
4.5.5 Detailed Wiring Description for Terminals of the Control Loop............................................... 64
4.5.6 Other Remarks for Wiring ......................................................................................................... 69
CHAPTER 5 COMMISSIONING AND TEST RUN ............................................................................ 71
5.1 RUN COMMAND GIVEN ..................................................................................................................... 71
5.1.1 Run Command Channel of the Inverter .................................................................................... 71
5.1.2 Frequency Given Channel of the Inverter ................................................................................. 72
5.1.3 Working Status of the Inverter .................................................................................................. 72
5.1.4 Run Mode of the Inverter .......................................................................................................... 72
5.2 OPERATION GUIDE ............................................................................................................................ 72
5.2.1 Function for Individual Parts of the Operator ........................................................................... 73
5.2.2 LED Indicator ........................................................................................................................... 73
5.2.3 LED Digital Tube ...................................................................................................................... 74
5.2.4 LCD Display ............................................................................................................................. 74
5.2.4 Keyboard ................................................................................................................................... 74
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
5.3 OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................ 74
5.3.1 Power On and Initialization....................................................................................................... 75
5.3.2 Display After Power On ............................................................................................................ 75
5.3.3 【Monitor State】 In Detail .................................................................................................... 75
5.3.4 【Control Panel】 In Detail .................................................................................................... 76
5.3.5 Operation Mode ........................................................................................................................ 77
5.4 FAST COMMISSIONING FOR V/F CONTROL......................................................................................... 80
5.5 OPERATION EXAMPLE ....................................................................................................................... 80
5.6 FAULT DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................. 80
CHAPTER 6 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETER TABLE .......................................................................... 83
6.1 INTRODUCTION TO FUNCTION CODE PARAMETERS TABLE ................................................................ 83
6.2 SIMPLE TABLE OF FUNCTION CODE PARAMETERS ............................................................................. 83
6.2.1 Group P0X User Parameters ..................................................................................................... 83
6.2.2 Group P1X Control Parameters ................................................................................................. 83
6.2.3 Group P2X Motor Parameters ................................................................................................... 88
6.2.4 Group P3X Digital Parameters .................................................................................................. 91
6.2.5 Group P4X Speed Control Parameters ...................................................................................... 94
6.2.6 Group P5X Process Control Parameters ................................................................................... 96
6.2.7 Group P6X High-Performance Control Parameters .................................................................. 99
6.2.8 Group P7X Enhanced Control Parameters .............................................................................. 101
6.2.9 Group P8X Communication Parameters ................................................................................. 105
6.2.10 Group P9X Fault and Display Parameters............................................................................. 106
6.3 USER PARAMETERS RECORD SHEET ................................................................................................ 110
CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER DETAILS ................................................................................................ 111
7.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE MAIN MENU ................................................................................................111
7.1.1 Parameter Setting .....................................................................................................................111
7.1.2 Motor Tuning ...........................................................................................................................111
7.1.3 Fault Check ..............................................................................................................................111
7.1.4 Parameter Processing .............................................................................................................. 112
7.2 CLASSIFICATION AND FORMAT OF PARAMETER GROUPS.................................................................. 113
7.2.1 Format of Parameter Groups ................................................................................................... 113
7.2.2 Zoning of Parameter Groups ................................................................................................... 113
7.3 GROUP P0X USER PARAMETER GROUPS ......................................................................................... 114
7.3.1 Group P00 Basic Function Parameters .................................................................................... 114
7.3.2 Group P01~09 User Function Parameter ............................................................................... 115
7.4 GROUP P1X CONTROL PARAMETER GROUPS................................................................................... 115
7.4.1 Group P10 Basic Control Parameters ...................................................................................... 115
7.4.2 Group P11 Start Control Parameter ......................................................................................... 119
7.4.3 Group P12 Parking Control Parameters .................................................................................. 123
7.4.4 Group P13 Braking Function V/F Control Parameters ........................................................... 125
7.4.5 Group P14 V/F control Parameters ......................................................................................... 126
7.5 GROUP P2X MOTOR PARAMETER GROUPS ...................................................................................... 127
7.5.1 Group P20 Basic Motor Parameters ........................................................................................ 127
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
7.5.2 Group P21 Advanced Motor Parameters ................................................................................. 128
7.5.3 Group P23 Motor Protection Parameters ................................................................................ 129
7.6 GROUP P3X TERMINAL PARAMETER GROUPS ................................................................................. 130
7.6.1 Group P30 Digital Input Parameters ....................................................................................... 130
7.6.2 Group P31 Digital Output Parameters..................................................................................... 134
7.6.3 Group P32 Analog Input Parameters ....................................................................................... 141
7.6.4 Group P33 Analog Output Parameters .................................................................................... 142
7.7 GROUP P4X SPEED PARAMETER GROUPS ........................................................................................ 144
7.7.1 Group P40 Basic Speed Parameters ........................................................................................ 144
7.7.2 Group P41 Digital Multi-speed Parameters ............................................................................ 145
7.8 GROUP P5X PROCESS CONTROL PARAMETER GROUPS.................................................................... 147
7.8.1 Group P50 Process Open Loop Parameters............................................................................. 147
7.8.2 Group P51 Process Close Loop Parameters ............................................................................ 149
7.9 GROUP P6X HIGH-PERFORMANCE CONTROL PARAMETER GROUPS ................................................ 153
7.9.1 Group P60 Speed Control Parameters ..................................................................................... 153
7.9.2 Group P61
Current Control Parameters ............................................................................... 155
7.10 GROUP P7X ENHANCED CONTROL PARAMETER GROUPS .............................................................. 155
7.10.1 Group P70 Limit and Protection Parameters ......................................................................... 155
7.10.2 Group P71
Control Optimization Parameters..................................................................... 158
7.11 GROUP P8X COMMUNICATION PARAMETER GROUPS .................................................................. 163
7.11.1 Group P80
Communication Selection Parameters ............................................................. 163
7.11.2 Group P81
Modbus Communication Parameters ............................................................... 163
7.11.3 Group P82 Profibus_DP Communication Parameters ........................................................ 164
7.12 GROUP P9X FAULT AND DISPLAY PARAMETER GROUPS .............................................................. 165
7.12.1 Group P90
Language Selection Parameters ....................................................................... 165
7.12.2 Group P91
LCD Display Parameters ................................................................................. 165
7.12.3 Group P92
LED Display Parameters .................................................................................. 166
7.12.4 Group P93 Running Record Parameters ............................................................................... 166
7.12.5 Group P94 Troubleshooting Parameters ................................................................................ 167
7.12.6 Group P95 Product Identification Parameters .................................................................... 169
7.12.7 Group P96
Inverter Product Parameters ............................................................................. 169
CHAPTER 8 FAULT CHECK .............................................................................................................. 171
8.1 THE FUNCTION OF PROTECTION AND CHECK................................................................................... 171
8.2 FAULT DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART ..................................................................................................... 178
CHAPTER 9
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................... 181
9.1 WARRANTY ..................................................................................................................................... 181
9.2 PRODUCT INQUIRY .......................................................................................................................... 182
9.3 ROUTINE CHECK ............................................................................................................................. 182
9.4 PERIODIC CHECK ............................................................................................................................. 182
APPENDIX A
INVERTER EMC INSTALLATION GUIDE ......................................................... 185
A.1 NOISE SUPPRESSION ....................................................................................................................... 185
A.1.1 Types of Noise ........................................................................................................................ 185
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
A.1.2 Noise Transmission Route ...................................................................................................... 185
A.1.3 Basic Method for Noise Suppression ..................................................................................... 186
A.2 WIRING REQUIREMENT .................................................................................................................. 187
A.2.1 Requirement for Cable Laying ............................................................................................... 187
A.2.2 Requirement for Cable Cross Section Area ............................................................................ 187
A.2.3 Requirement for Shielded Cable ............................................................................................ 188
A.2.4 Installation Requirement for Shielded Cable.......................................................................... 188
A.3 GROUNDING ................................................................................................................................... 188
A.3.1 Type of Grounding ................................................................................................................. 188
A.3.2 Precaution for Ground Wiring ................................................................................................ 189
A.4 SURGE ABSORBER INSTALLATION................................................................................................... 189
A.5 LEAKAGE CURRENT AND ITS SOLUTION ......................................................................................... 190
A.5.1 Ground Leakage Current ........................................................................................................ 190
A5.2 Cable Inter-line Leaking .......................................................................................................... 190
A.6 RADIATION SUPPRESSION ............................................................................................................... 190
A.7 POWER CABLE FILTER GUIDE ......................................................................................................... 192
A.7.1 Function of Power Cable Filter .............................................................................................. 192
A.7.2 Precaution for Power Cable Filter Installation ....................................................................... 192
A.8 INSTALLATION SECTION DIVIDE FOR EMC INVERTER .................................................................... 192
A.9 PRECAUTION FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................................................... 194
A.10 EMC STANDARD FULFILLED BY AS180 SERIES HIGH-PERFORMANCE INVERTER ........................ 195
APPENDIX B
STANDARD COMPATIBILITY ............................................................................. 197
APPENDIX C MODBUS COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL .......................................................... 199
C.1 COMMAND DATA [REGISTERS 3 AND 6] [BITS 1 AND 5].................................................................... 199
C.2 MONITORING DATA [REGISTER 4] [BIT 2] ........................................................................................ 202
APPENDIX D
CUSTOMER COMPLAINT .................................................................................... 211
APPENDIX E
PRODUCT WARRANTY CARD ............................................................................ 213
WARRANTY AGREEMENT ................................................................................................................ 214
NOTICE TO CUSTOMERS ................................................................................................................. 215
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 1
Chapter 1 Safety Notice
This section covers the safety notice and matters needing attention during use of AS180 inverter,
safety notice, commissioning/operation, fault overhaul and product disposal treatment etc. relating to
safety. To ensure personal safety and lengthen the service life of equipment and its connecting device,
please be sure to read the following safety rules and warnings as well as all warning marks attached to
the equipment before installation and commissioning. Please carefully read this information.
1.1 Safety-related Sign
All safety related contents in this manual are marked following labels. All contents attached
with these safety signs are important and must be followed strictly.
! Danger
Indicates a hazardous situation, if a mistake operation could result in death
or serious injury.
! Notice
Indicates a hazardous situation, if a mistake operation could result in minor
or severe injury and equipment trouble.
Important
In addition, even if
Need to be followed and pay greater attention.
! Notice
matters, according to the specific situation, sometimes
also can lead to major accidents.
1
Safety Notice
including sign description, usage, arrival confirmation, transportation and storage, installation, wiring
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 1
1.2 Safety Notes
1.2.1 Usage
Safety Notice
! Danger
This series inverter is used to control the operation of three-phase motor at variable speed, other
than single-phase motor or other purposes, otherwise inverter fault or fire may be caused.
This series inverter can’t be simply applied on the occasions directly related to personal safety,
such as medical device.
This series inverter is produced under the strict quality management system. If any serious
accident or loss may be caused by its fault, safety measures such as redundancy or bypass shall be
provided.
1.2.2 Arrival Inspection
! Notice
The product delivered must be in perfect condition and completely consistent with the
information on the order form. If the product is damaged or inconsistent with the information on the
order form, please contact your local distributor or agent or manufacturer.
If the equipment delivered has any damage or missing part, it shall not be installed or put into
operation, otherwise it may cause accident.
1.2.3 Transportation and Storage
! Notice
Avoid violent vibration or impact during transportation.
If any equipment damage is found, it must be informed to the transport company.
Equipment transportation and storage must satisfy the specified ambient conditions.
If the device is stored for more than 1 year, then the capacitor must be recharged.
2
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
! Danger
Chapter 1
1.2.4 Installation
Be careful of fire or electric shock.
corrosive danger.
! Notice
Please hold the product bottom during handling and installation, to avoid crush or break the
inverter.
Don’t install the equipment in the areas which are easily affected by continuous vibration, shock
or electromagnetic interference.
The inverter must be installed on the flame retardant object such as metal, and keep away from
the flammable material or heat.
Be careful of fire! To ensure no foreign matters (sawdust, scrap iron, dust or paper scrap) inside
the inverter or on its radiator.
A certain space must be provided between inverter and inverter, inverter and inner wall of another
equipment/electrical cabinet. (Refer to Installation Location and Spacing for the details).
Horizontal installation is prohibited.
1.2.5 Electrical Wiring
! Danger
Wiring must be executed by the qualified electrical engineering staff, otherwise electric shock or
inverter damage may be caused.
Power supply must be disconnected prior to wiring, otherwise electric shock or fire may be
caused.
Ground terminal PE must be reliably grounded, otherwise the inverter casing may be electrified.
Don’t touch the main loop terminal, which shall not contact the casing, otherwise it may cause
electric shock.
3
Safety Notice
Don’t install the equipment in the flammable and combustible areas or those with water or
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 1
Turn on the power supply when the run signal is connected, then the motor will run automatically,
then please confirm the power supply is connected after the run signal is disconnected. Otherwise
personal injury may be caused.
Safety Notice
For 3-wire system sequential control, wiring can be executed for the control loop after parameters
of multifunctional input terminals are set, otherwise personal injury may be caused due to motor
rotation.
1.2.6 Test Run
! Notice
Be sure not to connect the power input cable to motor terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3, nor motor
cable to the power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3.
Power line and signal line must be laid in different troughs, with minimum space 30cm between
them. The cable connected can’t touch any rotating mechanical part.
Capacitor or LC/RC noise filter with phase advance isn’t permitted to connect to the output end
of the inverter, otherwise internal components of the inverter may be damaged.
Wiring cable of the main loop terminal shall be provided with crimp terminals with insulating
bush.
Selection of input and output cable of the inverter, choose the cable with proper section according
to inverter power.
If the cable length between inverter and motor exceeds 100m or running with several motors, it
suggests use output reactor, to avoid overcurrent due to too large capacitance distributed, so as to
produce inverter fault.
Be sure not to use the load other than 3-phase AC motor.
Please ensure to take off the load when executing rotating self-learning. The motor will run and
stop repeatedly before the self-learning is completed, therefore don’t touch it, otherwise personal
injury may be caused.
! Danger
Please ensure to turn on the power supply after the front outer cover has been installed. Don’t
remove the outer cover when the power supply is turned on, otherwise electric shock may be caused.
4
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
function setting is executed).
Chapter 1
Please prepare the emergency stop switch additionally (stop button is effective only when
Please ensure reset alarm after run signal is switched off, otherwise personal injury may be
! Notice
Be sure to have motor no-load commissioning first, and then motor load commissioning. Don’t
touch the radiator, motor or other high temperature part when the equipment is running or within a
period of time after the equipment is disconnected, to avoid scald.
Don’t start or stop the inverter by means of connecting or disconnecting the power supply
repeatedly, otherwise it will damage the equipment/system.
Prior to running, please ensure that the motor and machine are within the permissible range of
application, otherwise equipment damage may be caused.
When it is used with the lifting equipment, mechanical brake device will be provided at the same
time.
Don’t change the inverter parameters at will, most of the factory set parameters of the inverter are
able to satisfy the running requirement, only to set some necessary ones. Random modification may
cause mechanical damage.
1.2.7 Maintenance and Inspection
! Danger
There are HV terminals in the inverter, don’t touch them randomly, otherwise electric shock may
be caused.
Be sure to install the protective cover when the equipment is electrified. In addition, when
remove the protective cover, be sure to disconnect the circuit breaker for wiring, otherwise electric
shock may be caused.
After power supply of the main loop is cut off, please wait for 10 min at least, then execute
maintenance and inspection only after the charge indicator of the outer cover went off, otherwise
electric shock may be caused due to the residual voltage on the capacitor.
Except for the appointed staff, don’t execute maintenance, inspection or replacement operation
by others. Prior to these operations, please take off the metal ornaments (watch, ring, etc). During
operation, please use the tools treated with insulation, otherwise electric shock may be cause.
5
Safety Notice
caused.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 1
! Notice
Don’t touch the circuit board because there is CMOS large scale integrated circuit, to avoid
damage to the board.
Safety Notice
1.2.8 Disposal Treatment
! Danger
Explosion may be caused when electrolytic capacitor of the main loop and that on the printed
board is burning. Poisonous gas may be produced when plastic parts are burning. Disposal of the
equipment must be based on the laws and regulations on processing the industrial electronic waste of
the related environmental protection department.
1.2.9 Accord with Low Voltage Directive
! Danger
Our products meet the standard of EN61800-5-1:2007, thus they are in accord with “Low Voltage
Directive 2006/95/EC”.
Make sure that the whole system meets EC requirement if this inverter is integrated in the whole
electrical system as a component.
Please note:
①To ensure that machine is grounded, and the ground terminal block is grounded separately
②Prohibit to ground inverter at △ , and use IT power
③To ensure that the cabinet is grounded if inverter is installed in it
④Use CE certified breaker, electromagnetic contactor and other components. Type B leakage
current circuit breaker is required
The protection level of this inverter is class 1. And please use it under the conditions as
overvoltage Catalogue Ⅲ. 3, and pollution Degree Ⅱ.
1.2.10 Others
! Notice
Don’t place the inverter in the environment containing halogen (F, Cl, Br and I) under any
6
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
1.3 Matters Needing Attention
The motor shall be executed with insulation inspection when it is used for the first time, reused
after long time storage or regular inspection, to avoid inverter damage due to insulation failure of
motor winding. During insulation inspection, be sure to separate the motor wiring from the inverter,
500V megameter is recommended. Insulation resistance measured shall be below 5 MΩ.
1.3.2 Thermal Protection of the Motor
If the chosen motor doesn’t match with the rated capacity of AS180 series inverter, especially
rated power of the inverter is greater than that of the motor, please adjust the related motor protection
parameters of AS180 or install a thermal relay in front of the motor, to protect the motor.
1.3.3 Heating and Noise of the Motor
The output voltage of the inverter is PWM wave, with a certain harmonic, therefore temperature
rise, noise and vibration of the motor are slighted increased comparing to power frequency running.
When the ordinary motor runs at a low speed for a long time driven by the inverter, its cooling
effect becomes poor, and its temperature will rise. If it needs to run at a low speed and constant torque
for a long time, variable frequency motor must be chosen or forced air cooling shall be adopted.
1.3.4 Notices for Input and Output
The output of AS180 is PWM wave, if capacitor to improve power factor or voltage dependent
resistor for lightning protection is installed on the output side, instant overcurrent or damage will be
caused to the inverter. Don’t use it.
Schematic diagram shows that output side of inverter can not connect capacitor. See Fig. 1.3.
U
V
W
M
Fig. 1.3 Capacitor cannot be connected to the output of inverter
If a contractor is provided between the power supply and input end of the inverter, then it is
prohibited to control start or stop of the inverter with this contactor.
If the switching elements such as contactor are provided between the output end and the motor, it
shall ensure the inverter to have making-breaking operation without any output. The contactor won’t
7
Safety Notice
1.3.1 Motor Insulation Inspection
Chapter 1
circumstances of transportation or setting, otherwise inverter damage or parts burning may be caused.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 1
be closed when the inverter is outputting, otherwise module damage is easily produced.
Start and stop of the inverter can be controlled by the terminal. Direct and frequent start and stop
with the use of switching elements such as contactor on the input side of the inverter will be prohibited,
otherwise equipment damage may be caused.
Safety Notice
1.3.5 Use Beyond the Rated Voltage Value
If AS180 series inverter is used when the external voltage isn’t within the permissible operating
voltage scope specified in this manual, damage to the inverter components may be caused. If necessary,
please use the related boosting or dropping device to have voltage change processing.
1.3.6 Lightning Surge Protection
This series inverter is provided with lightning surge protective device, with certain
self-protection ability to the inductive thunder. The customer shall provide protection in front of the
inverter at the places with frequent lightning.
1.3.7 Leakage Protection
High speed switch will work when the inverter is running, leading to high frequency leakage
current, which will cause malfunction of the leakage protection circuit sometimes. When the above
problem occurs, a leakage protector shall be correctly installed, besides carrier frequency reduction or
lead shortening.
The followings must be noted during installation of the leakage protection circuit:

Leakage protector must be set on the input side of the inverter, it is suitable to put it behind
the air switch (non-fuse circuit breaker).

Leakage protector shall adopt that not sensitive to higher harmonic or that dedicated to the
inverter (sensitivity: 30mA above). If the ordinary leakage protector is applied, whose
sensitivity shall be better than 200mA and actuation time shall be above 0.1s.
1.3.8 Use of Decreasing
When the ambient temperature exceeds 40℃, the inverter shall be decreased by 2% for
temperature rise of every 1℃. And external forced cooling must be added.
In the areas where the altitude is greater than 1000m, cooling effect of the inverter will become
poor due to thin air, the inverter shall be decreased by 1% for altitude rise of every 100m, the
maximum altitude is 3000m;
When the carrier frequency set exceeds the factor setting, the inverter shall be decreased by 10%
for frequency increase of every 1 kHz;
Please refer to our company for the details of decreasing.
8
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
AC asynchronous motor and permanent magnet synchronous motor are suitable for the inverter,
please be sure to choose the inverter according to motor nameplate.
Chapter 1
1.3.9 Adaptive Motor
Built-in default motor parameters of the inverter are asynchronous motor ones, but necessary
situation, to meet the actual value, otherwise operation effect and protective performance may be
affected.
If short circuit appears inside the cable or the motor, the inverter will send an alarm or even be
damaged, therefore insulation short circuit testing shall be made for the motor and cable initially
installed, as well as during the daily maintenance. Please note that the inverter and the part to be
tested must be disconnected completely during testing.
9
Safety Notice
motor parameter identification or default value modification shall be made according to the actual
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 2 Product Overview
3-phase AC asynchronous motor with motor capacity 2.2~400kW. AS180 series inverter with factory
Chapter 2
AS180 series is 400V (380V~460V) V/F control high performance inverter, and applies to
default set provides the ideal solution for many simple motor control applications, it is also can be
2.1 Nameplate Description
The nameplate is attached to the side of the inverter, with the model, specification, batch No. and
manufacturing code, etc on it.
Nameplate
Fig. 2-1 Inverter Nameplate (example)
2.1.1 Description of Inverter Nameplate
Inverter nameplate, see Fig.2-2. Nameplate records the model, specification and lot number.
Fig. 2-2 The description of the inverter nameplate
11
Product Overview
applied to more advanced motor control operation after the related parameters are set.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
2.1.2 Product (order No.) Description
Chapter 2
In the column “inverter model” on the nameplate, specification, voltage grade, motor type and
maximum power of the inverter are expressed in letters and numbers.
AS180 4 T 0045
Product Overview
High
AS180 Performance
V/F
4
400V
T
3-Phase
Code
Motor Capacity
02P2
03P7
05P5
07P5
2.2kW
0011
0015
18P5
0022
11kW
15kW
18.5kW
22kW
30kW
37kW
45kW
55kW
75kW
90kW
110kW
132kW
160kW
185kW
200kW
220kW
250kW
280kW
315kW
355kW
400kW
0030
0037
0045
0055
0075
0090
0110
0132
0160
0185
0200
0220
0250
0280
0315
0355
0400
3.7kW
5.5kW
7.5kW
Fig. 2-3 Description of inverter model
2.1.3 Description of Product Specification
In the column “inverter specification” on the nameplate, voltage level and rated current value of
the inverter are expressed in letters and numbers.
Table 2.1 Inverter Specification Series
Running with 40℃, and heavy load
Inverter series
AS180
Input current(A)
Output
Adaptation
Over load
current(A)
motor(kW)
120%(1min)
4T02P2
5.3
5
2.2
6
4T03P7
7.5
7
3.7
8.4
12
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Running with 40℃, and heavy load
Inverter series
Output
Adaptation
Over load
current(A)
motor(kW)
120%(1min)
11.5
11
5.5
13.2
4T07P5
16
15
7.5
18
4T0011
21
20
11
24
4T0015
30.5
29
15
34.8
4T18P5
38
36
18.5
43.2
4T0022
46
44
22
52.8
4T0030
59
56
30
67.2
4T0037
75
72
37
86.4
4T0045
94
90
45
108
4T0055
115
110
55
132
4T0075
154
148
75
177.6
4T0090
183
176
90
211.2
4T0110
216
208
110
249.6
4T0132
261
252
132
302.4
4T0160
306
296
160
355.2
4T0185
367
356
185
427.2
4T0200
402
390
200
468
4T0220
427
415
220
498
4T0250
481
468
250
561.6
4T0280
533
520
280
624
4T0315
614
600
315
720
4T0355
664
650
355
780
4T0400
755
740
400
888
Notes: 1. The range of voltage is 380~460V.
2. The maximum power of adaptative motor is the rated power of 4-pole 50Hz standard
motor. During the actual application, nameplate of the motor must be examined, to ensure
the inverter selected is match with the motor.
3. The above is the rated current under default carrier frequency, <=15kW, carrier frequency
6kHz; <30kW, carrier frequency 5k, <=55kW, carrier frequency 4kHz; <=75kW, carrier
frequency 3kHz; >75kW, carrier frequency 2kHz.
13
Product Overview
4T05P5
Chapter 2
AS180
Input current(A)
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
2.2 Technical Indicator and Specification of Inverter
Chapter 2
Input voltage
Input frequency
Permissible voltage
Power
input
variation
Product Overview
Current harmonic
Transient voltage sag
Voltage
Power
output
Output frequency
Overload grade
Output frequency
precision
Optoelectronic isolated
input
Open collector output
Digital
380V ~ 460V (-15% ~ +10%), 3-phase power supply
45 ~ 65Hz
Voltage unbalance<3%
Built-in DC reactor for 30kW and above, with current harmonic <40% (full load)
Externally installed DC reactor for 30kW and below (optional)
3-phase AC380V ~ 460V, inpout voltage<AC300V, under-voltage protection
15ms later.
0VAC ~ input voltage
0.00 ~ 300.00Hz
120%, 1min
±0.01% (digital command-10 ~ +45℃)
±0.1% (analog command 25±10℃)
7 optoelectronic isolated inputs, 24V, either high or low level is effective, which
is settable. Input functions can be defined.
2 open collector outputs, output functions can be defined
2 relay outputs with normally open contact, contact capacity: inductive,
I/O
1.5A/250VAC, output functions can be defined.
Relay output
2 relay outputs with normally open and close double contact, contact capacity:
resistive, 4.5A/250VAC or 4.5A/30VDC; inductive: 0.4A/250VAC or
0.4A/30VDC; output functions can be defined.
Analog
I/O
Control
characteri
stics
Analog input
Analog output
2 analog inputs, precision 0.1%:
Voltage: -10V ~ +10VDC or current: 0~20mA optional signal
2 analog outputs, precision 0.1%:
Voltage: -10V ~ +10VDC or current: 0~20mA optional signal
Control mode
V/F control
High-Performance V/F control
Starting torque
2.50Hz 150%
0.5Hz,120%
Speed regulation range
1:50
1:200
± 2%
±0.5%
Speed stabilizing
precision
Carrier frequency
Frequency set resolution
1.1~8kHz; automatically adjust the carrier frequency according to load
characteristic
0.01Hz (digital command)
14
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
±0.06Hz/120Hz (analog command 11 bit + unsigned)
Run command channel
reference
Operation panel reference, digital/analog reference, communication
channel
reference and functional function reference
Torque lifting
Automatic and manual torque lifting
The user defines V/F curve, linear V/F curve and 3 reduced torque
V/F curve
characteristic curves.
fluctuation of bus voltage, so as to relieve the influence of the voltage
regulation
fluctuation of grid on the output voltage fluctuation.
Continuous operation
Realize continuous operation by controlling the bus voltage during
under transient outage
instantaneous power failure.
Built-in braking unit for 22kW and below, with braking resistor externally
Dynamic braking capacity
(optional)
Externally installed braking unit for 22kW and above (optional)
DC braking capacity
Special
functions
Process PID
Common DC bus
Braking current: 0.0 ~ 100.0% rated current
The standard operation panel could upload, download the parameters, and
indicate copy progress.
Closed loop control for quantity of process.
Realize the common DC bus power supply for several inverters
Blocked rotor
Motor
protection
Motor overload
Motor overheat (PTC)
Speed limitation
Output current amplitude limiting
Inverter overload
IGBT I²t overload
Input power undervoltage/overvoltage
DC bus undervoltage/overvoltage
Inverter
protection
IGBT overheat
Radiator overheat
Power failure
Abnormal +10V power output
Analog input signal loss (speed reference value loss)
Abnormal communication
Connecting failure for encoder
Self-tuning failure
15
Product Overview
Automatically regulate the duty cycle of output PWM signal according to
Automatic voltage
Parameter copy
Chapter 2
Frequency reference
Operation panel reference, control terminal reference and communication
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Vertically installed inside the electrical control cubicle with good ventilation.
Horizontal or other installation is not permitted. Cooling medium is air. It is
Place of service
Chapter 2
installed in the environment free from direct sunshine, dust, corrosive gas,
combustible gas, oily mist, steam and dripping water.
Ambient temperature
-10 ~ +40℃
Temperature derating
>40℃, the rated output current decreases by 2% if the temperature increases
use
Product Overview
Ambient
conditions
every 1℃ (maximum 50℃)
Altitude
<1000m
Altitude derating use
Ambient humidity
Vibration
>1000m, the rated output current decreases by 1% if the altitude increases
every 100m (maximum 3000m)
5 ~ 95%, without condensation
2≤f<9Hz 3.5mm; 9≤f<200Hz, 10 m/s2; 200≤f<500Hz, 15 m/s2
(transportation)
Vibration
2≤f<9 0.3mm; 9≤f<200Hz, 1m/s2
(installation)
Storage temperature
Protection degree
-40 ~ +70℃
IP20
Type
Movable
Length
Control
panel
Others
1m (it can be customized, maximum 5m)
Connection
RJ45
Text display
4 lines
LED display
4-bit
Visual LED indicator
4
Key
9
Cooling mode
Forced air cooling
Installation way
Inside the cubicle
Certification
CE
2.3 Installation Simensions of the Inverter
2.3.1 Product Appearance and Name of each Part
Refer to Figures 2-4, 2-5 and 2-6 for appearance of the inverter and name of each part.
16
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Manipulator
Warning text
Ground wire
Mounting hole
Fig. 2-4 A1 specifications
Mounting hole
Panel
Casing
Manipulator
Warning text
Nameplate
Wiring cover
Fig. 2-5 A2~A3 specifications
17
Product Overview
Casing
Chapter 2
Nameplate
Panel
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Panel
Casing
Chapter 2
Manipulator
Nameplate
Wiring cover
Product Overview
Mounting hole
Fig. 2-6 A4~A9 specifications
2.3.2 Product Boundary Dimension and Mounting Dimension
2.3.2.1 A1 Specification and Dimension
Fig. 2-7 A1 specification and installation dimensions
18
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Specifications
Installing
A
B
H
W
D
AS180
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
100
288.5
300
160
162
Diameter
Φ(mm)
Tightening
Installation
Bolt
Nut
Washer
4M4
4M4
4Φ4
torque
(Nm)
Weight
(kg)
Chapter 2
Model
4T02P2
4T03P7
A1
5.0
4.5
Product Overview
4T05P5
1.1
4T07P5
2.3.2.2 A2~A9 Specification and Dimension
Fig. 2-8 A2~A3 specification and installation dimensions
19
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 2
Product Overview
Fig. 2-9 A4~A9 specification and installation dimensions
Specifi
Model
A
B
H
W
D
cations
AS180
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
165.5
357
379
222
182
Installing
Diameter
Φ(mm)
Installation
Bolt
Nut
Washer
Tightening
Weight
torque (Nm)
(kg)
4T0011
A2
8
4T0015
7.0
4T18P5
A3
4T0022
4M6
4M6
4Φ6
3.5
165.5
392
414
232
182
10.3
200
512
530
330
288
29.5
4T0030
4T0037
A4
4T0045
9.0
4M8
4M8
4Φ8
9
4T0055
A5
200
585
610
718
750
768
800
330
310
38
4T0075
A6
4T0090
4T0110
320
A7
79.5
430
350
13.0
81
4T0132
4M12
4M12
4Φ12
29
4T0160
A8
4T0185
374
844
880
500
352
14.0
4T0200
20
106.5
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
4T0220
112.5
4T0280
141
4T0315
A9
4T0355
168
500
997
1030
630
370
14.0
4M12
4M12
4T0400
4Φ12
29
Chapter 2
4T0250
169
170
Fig. 2-10 show the dimensions of the operator
Fig. 2-10 The dimension of the inverter Operator
2.4 Selection of Braking Unit and Braking Resistor
Negative torque maybe appear when the motor is running under braking. Therefore braking
component will be considered for the inverter, otherwise overcurrent or overvoltage will occur,
leading to tripping. AS180 series inverter with 30kW and below is provided with built-in braking unit,
only braking resistor externally provided; while 30kW and above is the externally installed braking
unit, it is recommended to choose the optional braking unit and braking resistor, whose specification
and quantity will be different based on the different ratio occupied by braking time within a braking
period.
When braking time occupied within a braking period is 10%, configuration of the externally
installed braking unit and braking resistor is shown as Table 2-2.
21
Product Overview
2.3.3 Operator Dimension
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Table 2-2 Configuration table for 400V braking unit and braking resistor
Chapter 2
Braking resistor (Utilization rate
Braking unit
Inverter model
Inverter
AS180
capacity (kW)
10%)
Specification of
Specification
Qty. (pcs)
equivalent
braking resistor
Qty.
(pcs)
Product Overview
4T02P2
2.2
260W 250Ω
1
4T03P7
3.7
390W 150Ω
1
4T05P5
5.5
520W 100Ω
1
4T07P5
7.5
780W 75Ω
1
4T0011
11
1040W 50Ω
1
4T0015
15
1560W 40Ω
1
4T18P5
18.5
4800W 32Ω
1
4T0022
22
4800W 27.2Ω
1
4T0030
30
6000W 20Ω
1
4T0037
37
BKU-4030
1
6000W 20Ω
1
4T0045
45
BKU-4045
1
9600W 16Ω
1
4T0055
55
BKU-4045
1
9600W 13.6Ω
1
4T0075
75
BKU-4030
2
6000W 20Ω
2
4T0090
90
BKU-4045
2
9600W 13.6Ω
2
4T0110
110
BKU-4110
1
18kW 6.7Ω
1
4T0132
132
BKU-4110
1
25kW 5Ω
1
4T0160
160
BKU-4220
1
40kW 3.4Ω
1
4T0185
185
BKU-4220
1
40kW 3.4Ω
1
4T0200
200
BKU-4220
1
40kW 3.4Ω
1
4T0220
220
BKU-4220
1
48kW 3.2Ω
1
4T0250
250
BKU-4220
1
48kW 3.2Ω
1
4T0280
280
BKU-4110
2
25kW 5Ω
2
4T0315
315
BKU-4220
2
40kW 3.4Ω
2
4T0355
355
BKU-4220
2
40kW 3.4Ω
2
4T0400
400
BKU-4220
2
40kW 3.4Ω
2
内置
When braking time occupied within a braking period is 20%, configuration of the externally
installed braking unit and braking resistor is shown as Table 2-3.
22
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Table 2-3 Configuration table for 400V braking unit and braking resistor
model
AS180
20%)
Inverter
capacity (kW)
Specification of
Specification
Qty. (pcs)
equivalent
braking resistor
Qty.
(pcs)
2.2
520W 230Ω
1
4T03P7
3.7
780W 140Ω
1
4T05P5
5.5
1040W 90Ω
1
4T07P5
7.5
1560W 70Ω
1
4T0011
11
2kW 47Ω
1
4T0015
15
3kW 34Ω
1
4T18P5
18.5
9600W 28Ω
1
4T0022
22
9600W 24Ω
1
4T0030
30
12kW 17Ω
1
4T0037
37
BKU-4045
1
12.5kW 17Ω
1
4T0045
45
BKU-4045
1
20kW 15Ω
1
4T0055
55
BKU-4030
2
10kW 24Ω
2
4T0075
75
BKU-4045
2
12.5kW 18Ω
2
4T0090
90
BKU-4110
1
36kW 6.7Ω
1
4T0110
110
BKU-4045
3
12.5kW 18Ω
3
4T0132
132
BKU-4045
3
12.5kW 16Ω
3
4T0160
160
BKU-4220
1
80kW 3.5Ω
1
4T0185
185
BKU-4220
1
80kW 3.2Ω
1
4T0200
200
BKU-4110
2
50kW 5Ω
2
4T0220
220
BKU-4110
2
50kW 5Ω
2
4T0250
250
BKU-4220
2
50kW 5Ω
2
4T0280
280
BKU-4220
2
60kW 4.7Ω
2
4T0315
315
BKU-4220
2
80kW 3.5Ω
2
4T0355
355
BKU-4220
2
80kW 3.5Ω
2
4T0400
400
BKU-4220
2
80kW 3.5Ω
2
内置
When braking time occupied within a braking period is 40%, configuration of the externally
installed braking unit and braking resistor is shown as Table 2-4.
23
Product Overview
4T02P2
Chapter 2
Inverter
Braking resistor (Utilization rate
Braking unit
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Table 2-4 Configuration table for 400V braking unit and braking resistor
Chapter 2
Inverter
model
AS180
Braking resistor (Utilization rate
Braking unit
40%)
Inverter
capacity (kW)
Specification of
Specification
Qty. (pcs)
equivalent
braking resistor
Qty.
(pcs)
Product Overview
4T02P2
2.2
1.3kW 180Ω
1
4T03P7
3.7
2.2kW 110Ω
1
4T05P5
5.5
3.3kW 75Ω
1
4T07P5
7.5
4.5kW 55Ω
1
4T0011
11
6.6kW 37Ω
1
4T0015
15
9kW 27Ω
1
4T18P5
18.5
11kW 22Ω
1
4T0022
22
13kW 18Ω
1
4T0030
30
10kW 27Ω
2
4T0037
37
BKU-4045
1
20kW 13.5Ω
1
4T0045
45
BKU-4030
2
12.5kW 22Ω
2
4T0055
55
BKU-4045
2
12.5kW 18Ω
2
4T0075
75
BKU-4045
2
20kW 15Ω
2
4T0090
90
BKU-4110
1
60kW 5Ω
1
4T0110
110
BKU-4110
1
60kW 5Ω
1
4T0132
132
BKU-4220
1
70kW 3.7Ω
1
4T0160
160
BKU-4220
1
70kW 3.7Ω
1
4T0185
185
BKU-4220
1
90kW 3Ω
1
4T0200
200
BKU-4110
2
60kW 5Ω
2
4T0220
220
BKU-4110
2
60kW 5Ω
2
4T0250
250
BKU-4220
2
70kW 3.7Ω
2
4T0280
280
BKU-4220
2
70kW 3.7Ω
2
4T0315
315
BKU-4220
2
90kW 3Ω
2
4T0355
355
BKU-4220
2
90kW 3Ω
2
4T0400
400
BKU-4220
2
90kW 3Ω
2
内置
24
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 3 Installation of the Inverter
3.1 Installation Steps

Examine and confirm the catalog number on the label is the same as that on the order form

Remove the packing of AS180 inverter and examine it for any damage during transportation
Chapter 3
Step 1: delivery of the inverter
Step 2: examine the line voltage
Examine and confirm that the line voltage is matched with voltage and frequency range of
the inverter
Step 3: install the inverter

Install the inverter as described in this document

Install any internal and external option
Step 4: wiring of the inverter

Connect the motor and ensure the voltage is consistent with the inverter

Connect the control line

Connect the speed reference

Connect the communication cable

Connect the encoder cable

Connect the power line after power is turned off
3.2 Mechanical Installation
3.2.1 Installation Environment of the Product
3.2.1.1 Temperature and Humidity
Operating ambient temperature is -10℃ ~ 40℃. Derating when the ambient temperature exceeds
40℃(maximum 50℃). For the ambient temperature greater than 40℃, derating by 2% for every
increase of 1℃. Relative humidity of the air is ≤95%, without condensation.
For the occasions with poor environment on site, it is recommended to enhance the cooling of the
inverter.
3.2.1.2 Altitude
In altitude below 1000m area, the inverter can operating under rated power. Derating when the
installation altitude over 1000m area (maximum 3000m). Fig 3-1 shows the relationship between
descendent rated output current and the altitude.
25
Installation of the Inverter

Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Rated
current
100%
Chapter 3
90%
80%
Installation of the Inverter
70%
1000
2000
3000
m
Fig 3-1 Diagram of rated output current vs. altitude
3.2.1.3 Other Environmental Requirements

Avoid installation in the places with violent vibration or shock, the maximum vibration
acceleration not greater than 5.8m/s2 (0.6g).

Don’t install it in the places with electromagnetic radiation point.

Avoid installation in the places with oil mist, metal dust and more dust.

Avoid installation in the places with poisonous and harmful gas, liquid, corrosive gas,
flammable and explosive gas.

Avoid installation in the places containing more salt content.

Be sure not to install it in the place with direct sunshine.

Be sure not to install it on the flammable object such as wood.

Be sure not to drop any boring residue inside the inverter during installation.
3.2.2 Installation Position and Space Requirement
!Danger
According to the installation method chosen, the inverter must be vertically installed:
-- inside the electrical cabinet
Horizontal installation in the electrical cabinet will be prohibited.
3.2.2.1 Installation Orientation
In order not to reduce the cooling effect of the inverter, it shall be installed in the place with good
ventilation, with vertical installation direction.
26
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
It must be vertically installed
inside the electrical cabinet
No horizontal installation
Chapter 3
When the user vertically installs the inverter, the included angle between it and the horizontal
plane will be 87o to 90o. The details are shown as Figure 3-3:
Electrical
cabinet wall
Front of the
inverter
(minimum included angle)
Horizontal plane
Figure 3-3 Permissible installation included angle
3.2.2.2
Installation Space
Several inverters may be installed side by side or up and down, space among inverters as well as
that between the inverter and the electrical cabinet wall shall be:
Refer to Figure 3-4 for the installation space of the inverter 37kW and below.
Refer to Figure 3-5 for the installation space of the inverter 45kW and above.
27
Installation of the Inverter
Figure 3-2 Installation orientation
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Greater than
120mm
Fan exhaust
Chapter 3
Greater
than
50mm
Greater than
350mm
Fan exhaust
Greater
than
50mm
Greater
than
100mm
Greater
than
100mm
Installation of the Inverter
Greater than
120mm
Greater than
350mm
Figure 3-5 Installation space schematic of the
Figure 3-4 Installation space schematic of the
inverter (55kW and above)
inverter (45kW and below)
3.2.3 Inverter Installation
Refer to Fig. 3-5 for the installation procedures:
Drill four mounting holes in the cabinet wall
Electrical cabinet wall
Mounting hole
Mounting hole
Figure 3-5 Installation procedures
28
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Important
Fasteners must have anti-vibration parts such as spring washer.
All four mounting screws must be securely tightened.
Chapter 3
3.3 Installation and Disassembling of the Operator and Panel
3.3.1 Connect/Disconnect the Operator
① Press latch springs at both sides of operator simultaneously to unhook the operator from the
front panel, and then the operator can be removed from inverter.
② A cable at the back of operator connecting to inverter needs to be unplugged. Note, do not pull
directly on the cable, it may damage the connection.
Connect and disconnect operator, see Fig. 3-6
Figure 3-6 Disconnect operator
3.3.1.2 Connect Operator
Plug the cable into the socket at the back of operator first, then slide one side of latch into the
groove of front panel, press operator against the panel until a “Click” sound heard. Both latches are
locked properly.
3.3.2 Open/Close Wiring Cap
3.3.2.1 Open Wiring Cap
① Loose two screws on wiring cap;
② Open wiring cap downward.
Open wiring cap, see Fig. 3-7.
29
Installation of the Inverter
3.3.1.1 Disconnect the Operator
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 3
Installation of the Inverter
Figure 3-7 Open wiring cap
3.3.2.2 Close Wiring Cap
Operate open wiring cap procedure reversely to close it, tighten two thumb screws.
3.3.3 Install and Disassemble Front Panel
Front panel needs to be dismounted when controlling loop is wired. For the convenience to wire
the main loop the front panel may also be removed.
3.3.3.1 Disassemble Front Panel
Procedures of disassembling front panel:
① Remove operator. Refer to chapter 3, 3.1 Connect/Disconnect the operator;
② Open wiring cap. Refer to chapter 3, 3.2 Open/Close wiring cab;
③ Loose two screws at top of the front panel and two screws inside wiring cap compartment,
and then the front panel can be removed.
The Operation to remove the front panel, see Fig. 3-8.
Figure 3-8 Disassemble front panel
30
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
3.3.3.2 Install Front Panel
Install front panel in a reversed order of disassembling the front panel.
Chapter 3
Installation of the Inverter
31
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 4 Wiring of the Inverter
This chapter introduces the wire connection in details in inverter and its peripheral equipment,
inverter terminal blocks, main circuit looping, controlling circuit looping and PG card.
Chapter 4
!Danger
◎ Ensure to have power supply fully disconnected before wiring.
Or it may cause electric shock.
Or it may cause electric shock.
◎ Ensure the protect grounding terminal PE to be grounded reliably.
Or it may cause electric shock.
◎ Don’t touch terminal block by hand directly, don’t connect the output cable to
the inverter encloser.
Or it may cause electric shock.
◎ Don’t connect power supply to output terminal U, V, W.
Or it may damage inverter.
◎ Do not short connect the terminal ○
+1 /○
+2 to○
-.
Or it may have a risk of explosion hazard.
!Caution
◎ Ensure the consistency between the voltage of power supply in AC main circuit
and rated voltage.
Or it may cause human injury and fire hazard.
◎ Connect braking resistor correctly referring to wiring diagram.
Or it may cause fire hazard.
◎ Secure fastenedly connect the main circuit to the wiring cables or to the wire
crimping terminal.
Or it may damage inverter.
33
Wiring of the Inverter
◎ Only the certified electrician can handle wiring task.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
4.1 Connect Inverter to Peripherals
4.1.1 Connection Diagram between Inverter and Peripherals
Connection diagram between the inverter and its peripheral equipments. See Fig. 4.1.
Chapter 4
Wiring of the Inverter
Fig. 4.1 The connection between the inverter and its peripheral equipment
Note: Sample drawing shows a 3-phase input power supply.
34
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
4.1.2 Connect Inverter to Peripherals
4.1.2.1 Input Power Connection
!Danger
Don’t operate inverter beyond the rated input voltage range.
Overvoltage may damage inverter permanently.
Table 4.1 The technical requirements for the input power
380~460V AC 3 phase,
Short Current
If incoming cable is properly protected by fuse, the max permissible short current in 1
(IEC60909 Standard)
second is 100kA
Frequency
45~65 Hz
Unbalance
Its maximum is ±3% of rated input line voltage.
Cable Temperature
It’s permissible that the inverter works at 90℃ for a long-term period.
-15%~+10%
4.1.2.2 Input Protection
Input protection includes breaker, fuse and emergency stop.
Breaker
Inverter doesn’t carry breaker by itself. Therefore breaker must be installed between AC input
power supply and the inverter. Ensure the following notice of the breaker:

Type selection must conform with the applied safety regulation, including (but not limited to)
national and local electric regulation.

During installation and maintenance to the inverter, breaker must ensure to stay at open
position and be locked.

Breaker doesn’t allow to control to start or stop the motor. Motor is controlled by operator
keypad or I/O terminal command.

Capacity of selected breaker should be 1.5~2 times of rated inverter current.

Breaker time response character should correspond with the inverter overheat protection
character (over 150% of rated output current for more than 1minute).
Fuse cutout
Terminal user must provide loop protection device, which is consistent with the national and local
electric laws and regulations. The table 4-2 introduces recommended fuse cutout types, it provides
short protection for inverter incoming cable.
35
Wiring of the Inverter
Input Voltage
Chapter 4
The connection technical requirements for power input (Main circuit)
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Table 4.2 The recommended fuse cutout types
Chapter 4
Wiring of the Inverter
Inverter Type
Input Current
Main Fuse Cutout
UL Grade T
AS180
(A)
IEC269gG(A)
(A)
4T02P2
5.3
10
10
CT10
4T03P7
7.5
10
10
CT10
4T05P5
11.5
16
15
CT16
4T07P5
16
20
20
CT20
4T0011
21
35
30
FE35
4T0015
30.5
35
40
FE40
4T18P5
38
45
50
FE45
4T0022
46
50
50
FE50
4T0030
59
71
71
FE71
4T0037
75
80
80
FE80
4T0045
94
100
100
FE100
4T0055
115
160
160
FEE160
4T0075
154
200
200
FEE200
4T0090
183
400
400
FWH-400A
4T0110
216
400
400
FWH-400A
4T0132
261
400
400
FWH-400A
4T0160
306
600
600
FWH-700A
4T0185
367
800
800
FWH-800A
4T0200
402
800
800
FWH-800A
4T0220
427
800
800
FWH-800A
4T0250
481
800
800
FWH-800A
4T0280
533
800
800
FWH-1000A
4T0315
614
800
800
FWH-1000A
4T0355
664
1000
1000
FWH-1200A
4T0400
755
1000
1000
FWH-1200A
Type
Emergency stop
General design and installation must include emergency stop device and other necessary safety
equipment. To control motor by operator keypad operation, or I/O commend can’t guarantee:
■
Emergency motor stop;
■
Separate inverter from hazardous voltage.
4.1.2.3 Input Power Cable/Connection
Input cable can be any one of followings:
36
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
■
4 core cable (3 phase and ground protection) without shield;
■
4 core insulated cable installed in conduit.
In any circumstances, the size of the conducting wire must smaller than the defined maximum
limit value. When motor cable is too long or motor cable cross-section is too large, inverter should be
derated and use cable based on the standard of cable cross-section (see Table 4.3). The larger the
cross-section of the cable is, the bigger the capacity to the ground is, the lager the leak current to the
added of the cross-section of cable, 5% of the current reduced. Table 4.3 lists types of copper cables
under different load currents. Recommended types are only suitable when the situation meets the top
Chapter 4
ground is. When choose cable with lager cross-section, output current should be reduced. One level
part of the table. Aluminum cable is not recommended.
IEC
Wiring of the Inverter
Table 4.3 Relevant standards of IEC and NEC requirements for input power cables
NEC
Based on:
Based on:
EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-2/2001 standard;
For copper cable , see NEC Table 310-16;
PVC Insulation;
Cable insulation at 90 °C;
Ambient temperature at 30 °C;
Ambient temperature at 40 °C;
Surface temperature at 70 °C;
No more than 3 current-carrying cables in the same
Copper net shielded symmetrical cable;
trunking, the cable trench, or the buried cables.
No more than 9 cables laid side by side in a same cable
Copper net shielded copper core cable
tray compartment.
Max Carry Current
Copper cable
2
Max Carry Current
Copper cable
(A)
(mm )
(A)
(mm2)
3.5
1
128
50
6.2
1.5
160
70
9
1.5
195
95
13
1.5
210
95
19
2.5
240
120
27
4
302
185
34
6
352
240
41
10
390
95×2P
48
10
426
95×2P
65
16
480
150×2P
80
25
520
150×2P
96
35
650
95×4P
To ensure human safety, correct operation and to reduce electromagnetic radiation, inverter and
37
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
motor must be grounded at their installed place.
■
The diameter of conductor must meet the requirements of the safety laws and regulations.
■
The shielding layer of power cable must be connected to PE terminal of inverter to meet the
safety guideline.
■
Only when the specifications of the power cable shielding layer meet safety requirements
can the shielding layer of power cable be used as ground connection.
Chapter 4
■
Don’t connect terminal blocks in series when multi inverters installed.
4.1.2.4 Output Power Cable/Connection
Table 4.4 Output power (Motor connection technical specification)
Technical specification for output power (motor)
Wiring of the Inverter
Output Voltage
0 ~input voltage, symmetric 3-phase
Current
see Chapter 2, “2.2 Technical Indexes and Specifications of the Inverter”
Switch frequency
Allow to set: 1.1~8kHz
Rated cable temperature
Allow long term working at 90 °C
Length of motor cable vs. switch
See Chapter 4, “4.4.5
frequency
Frequency”
Relationship between Length of Wire and Carrier
Grounding and wiring
Motor cable shielding: Motor cable requires to be shielded by wire conduit, armored cable or
shielded cable. Armored cable or shielded cable: high frequency low impedance shielded cable should
be adopted, such as braided copper wire mesh, aluminium wire mesh or wire mesh.
Wire conduit
■
Each end point of wire conduit must install a grounded bridging.
■
Wire conduit needs to be fixed on housing.
■
Laying an individual conduit for motor cable only. (separate input power cable and control
cable)
■
One separated conduit for each inverter
Armored cable
■
Each end point of wire conduit must install a grounded bridging;
■
To use cable having 6 wires (3 power lines, 3 grounding lines). Type MC continuous
corrugated Aluminum armored cable with symmetric grounding lines;
■
Metal-clay motor cable can share one cable tray with input power cable. But it can’t share
with control cable.
Shielded cable
Recommend to use symmetric PE conductor cable certified by CE or C-Tick.
38
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Grounding
Recommended cross-sectional area of grounded wire is in Table 4-13 of Chapter 4.3.4.1.
4.1.2.5
AC Reactor at the Input Side
In order to prevent the large current from flowing into the input power loop and damage the
rectifying elements when the peak pulse is input from the grid, AC reactor will be connected at the
input side, which also is able to improve power factor of the input side and reduce the higher harmonic
inverter 110kW and above (including 110kW).
Selection of AC reactor at the input side refers to Table 4-5.
Chapter 4
current. To effectively protect the inverter, it is recommended to add AC input reactor for 380V
Table 4-5 The recommended types of input AC resistor
Type
AS180
Power
(kW)
Recommended Type
Current
Inductance
Voltage
(A)
(mH)
Drop
4T02P2
2.2
ACR-0007-2M00-0.4SC
7A
2
2%
4T03P7
3.7
ACR-0010-1M40-0.4SC
10A
1.4
2%
4T05P5
5.5
ACR-0015-0M94-0.4SC
15A
0.94
2%
4T07P5
7.5
ACR-0020-0M70-0.4SC
20A
0.7
2%
4T0011
11
ACR-0030-0M47-0.4SC
30A
0.47
2%
4T0015
15
ACR-0040-0M36-0.4SC
40A
0.36
2%
4T18P5
18.5
ACR-0050-0M28-0.4SC
50A
0.28
2%
4T0022
22
ACR-0060-0M24-0.4SC
60A
0.24
2%
4T0030
30
ACR-0080-0M18-0.4SC
80A
0.18
2%
4T0037
37
ACR-0090-0M16-0.4SC
90A
0.156
2%
4T0045
45
ACR-0120-0M12-0.4SA
120A
0.117
2%
4T0055
55
ACR-0150-094U-0.4SA
150A
0.094
2%
4T0075
75
ACR-0200-070U-0.4SA
200A
0.07
2%
4T0090
90
ACR-0250-056U-0.4SA
250A
0.056
2%
39
Wiring of the Inverter
Inverter
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Inverter
Power
Type
(kW)
AS180
Chapter 4
Wiring of the Inverter
4.1.2.6
Recommended Type
Current
Inductance
Voltage
(A)
(mH)
Drop
4T0110
110
ACR-0250-056U-0.4SA
250A
0.056
2%
4T0132
132
ACR-0290-048U-0.4SA
290A
0.048
2%
4T0160
160
ACR-0330-042U-0.4SA
330A
0.042
2%
4T0185
185
ACR-0390-036U-0.4SA
390A
0.036
2%
4T0200
200
ACR-0490-028U-0.4SA
490A
0.028
2%
4T0220
220
ACR-0490-028U-0.4SA
490A
0.028
2%
4T0250
250
ACR-0600-024U-0.4SA
600A
0.024
2%
4T0280
280
ACR-0600-024U-0.4SA
600A
0.024
2%
4T0315
315
ACR-0660-022U-0.4SA
660A
0.022
2%
4T0355
355
ACR-0800-17U5-0.4SA
800A
0.0175
2%
4T0400
400
ACR-0800-17U5-0.4SA
800A
0.0175
2%
Interference Filter at the Input Side
When the inverter is working, other electronic equipment surrounded may be interfered by the
power line. Filter is adopted to reduce the interference to the surrounding equipment.
Selection of the filter at the input side of 380V inverter refers to Table 4-6.
Table 4-6 The recommended types of input filter
Inverter Type
Power
AS180
(kW)
4T02P2
2.2
RFI4C10
10A
4T03P7
3.7
RFI4C10
10A
4T05P5
5.5
RFI4C20
20A
4T07P5
7.5
RFI4C20
20A
4T0011
11
RFI4C36
36A
Recommended Type
40
Current
(A)
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Inverter Type
Power
AS180
(kW)
4T0015
15
RFI4C36
36A
4T18P5
18.5
RFI4C50
50A
4T0022
22
RFI4C50
50A
4T0030
30
RFI4C65
65A
4T0037
37
RFI4C80
80A
4T0045
45
RFI4C100
100A
4T0055
55
RFI4C150
150A
4T0075
75
RFI4C150
150A
4T0090
90
RFI4C200
200A
4T0110
110
RFI4C250
250A
4T0132
132
RFI4C250
250A
4T0160
160
RFI4C300
300A
4T0185
185
RFI4C400
400A
4T0200
200
RFI4C400
400A
4T0220
220
RFI4C600
600A
4T0250
250
RFI4C600
600A
4T0280
280
RFI4C600
600A
4T0315
315
RFI4C900
900A
4T0355
355
RFI4C900
900A
4T0400
400
RFI4C900
900A
Recommended Type
(A)
Chapter 4
Wiring of the Inverter
41
Current
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Sample diagram for the correct setting of noise filter at power supply side, see Fig. 4.2.
Power
Specific
Supply
Noise Filter
Inverter
M
Chapter 4
Other
Controller
Fig. 4.2 Correct noise filter installation at power supply side
Sample diagram for the incorrect setting of noise filter at power supply side, see Fig. 4.3 and Fig
4.4.
Wiring of the Inverter
Power
Supply
General
Noise Filter
Inverter
M
Other
Controller
Fig. 4.3 Incorrect noise filter installation at power supply side, example 1
In Fig. 4.3, a general noise filter at power supply side may not meet the required expectation
and should be avoided.
Power
Inverter
General
Other
Noise Filter
Controller
M
Fig. 4.4 Incorrect noise filter installation at power supply side, example 2
In Fig. 4.4, a general noise filter at receiving side may not meet the required expectation and
should be avoided.
Notice: the wire length between filter and inverter should as short as possible when installing
noise filter in the input side.
Filter housing and the installation of the cabinet should be large and reliable connections to
reduce reflux of impedance noise current lg.
42
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 4
Fig. 4.5 Noise current schematic diagram of noise filter
4.1.2.7
Contactor at the Input/Output Side
In order to protect the power supply and avoid the fault being enlarged, input power of the
inverter must be effectively cut off when the system has any fault. Electromagnetic contactor can be
Please don’t use the contactor to control start and stop of the motor.
4.1.2.8
Interference Filter at the Output Side
Output noise filter may reduce the radio noise caused by the cable between inverter and motor as
well as the leakage current of the conductor.
Selection of 380V output filter refers to Table 4-7.
Table 4-7 Recommended selection table of output filter
Inverter Type
Power
AS180
(kW)
4T02P2
2.2
RFO4B10
10
4T03P7
3.7
RFO4B10
10
4T05P5
5.5
RFO4B20
20
4T07P5
7.5
RFO4B20
20
4T0011
11
RFO4B36
36
4T0015
15
RFO4B36
36
4T18P5
18.5
RFO4B50
50
4T0022
22
RFO4B50
50
4T0030
30
RFO4B65
65
Recommended Type
43
Current
(A)
Wiring of the Inverter
mounted at the input side to control power on and off of the main loop, to ensure safety.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 4
Wiring of the Inverter
4.1.2.9
Inverter Type
Power
AS180
(kW)
4T0037
37
RFO4B80
80
4T0045
45
RFO4B100
100
4T0055
55
RFO4B150
150
4T0075
75
RFO4B150
150
4T0090
90
RFO4B200
200
4T0110
110
RFO4B250
250
4T0132
132
RFO4B250
250
4T0160
160
RFO4B300
300
4T0185
185
RFO4B400
400
4T0200
200
RFO4B400
400
4T0220
220
RFO4B600
600
4T0250
250
RFO4B600
600
4T0280
280
RFO4B600
600
4T0315
315
RFO4B900
900
4T0355
355
RFO4B900
900
4T0400
400
RFO4B900
900
Recommended Type
Current
(A)
AC Reactor at the Output Side
AC reactor at the output side can be chosen to control the radio frequency interference from the
inverter.
When the wire between the inverter and the motor is too long (>100m) or there are several motors
are running, because leakage current produced by the long cable-ground stray capacitance effect is too
large, the inverter is easily subject to overcurrent protection, at the same time, output reactor
compensation must be increased to avoid motor insulation damage.
Selection of AC reactor refers to Table 4-8.
44
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Table4-8 Recommended selection table of AC Reactor at the output side
Inverter
Type
AS180
Power
(kW)
Recommended Type
Current
Inductance
Voltage
(A)
(mH)
Droop
OCR-0007-1M00-0.4SC
7
1
1%
4T03P7
3.7
OCR-0010-0M70-0.4SC
10
0.7
1%
4T05P5
5.5
OCR-0015-0M47-0.4SC
15
0.47
1%
4T07P5
7.5
OCR-0020-0M35-0.4SC
20
0.35
1%
4T0011
11
OCR-0030-0M23-0.4SC
30
0.23
1%
4T0015
15
OCR-0040-0M18-0.4SC
40
0.18
1%
4T18P5
18.5
OCR-0050-0M14-0.4SC
50
0.14
1%
4T0022
22
OCR-0060-0M12-0.4SC
60
0.12
1%
4T0030
30
OCR-0080-087U-0.4SC
80
0.087
1%
4T0037
37
OCR-0090-078U-0.4SC
90
0.078
1%
4T0045
45
OCR-0120-058U-0.4SA
120
0.058
1%
4T0055
55
OCR-0150-047U-0.4SA
150
0.047
1%
4T0075
75
OCR-0200-035U-0.4SA
200
0.035
1%
4T0090
90
OCR-0250-028U-0.4SA
250
0.028
1%
4T0110
110
OCR-0250-028U-0.4SA
250
0.028
1%
4T0132
132
OCR-0290-024U-0.4SA
290
0.024
1%
4T0160
160
OCR-0330-021U-0.4SA
330
0.021
1%
4T0185
185
OCR-0390-018U-0.4SA
390
0.018
1%
4T0200
200
OCR-0490-014U-0.4SA
490
0.014
1%
4T0220
220
OCR-0490-014U-0.4SA
490
0.014
1%
4T0250
250
OCR-0600-012U-0.4SA
600
0.012
1%
4T0280
280
OCR-0600-012U-0.4SA
600
0.012
1%
4T0315
315
OCR-0660-011U-0.4SA
660
0.011
1%
4T0355
355
OCR-0800-08U7-0.4SA
800
0.087
1%
4T0400
400
OCR-0800-08U7-0.4SA
800
0.087
1%
45
Wiring of the Inverter
2.2
Chapter 4
4T02P2
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
4.1.2.10 DC Reactor
AS180 series inverter ≥37kW (400V grade) is provided with built-in DC reactor, which is able to
improve the power factor, avoid too large input current of the inverter due to the large capacity
transformer connected, leading to damage of the rectifier bridge, as well as avoid the damage caused
by harmonic due to voltage leap of the grid or phase control load to the rectifying circuit.
AS180 series inverter below 37kW (400V grade) is provided with externally installed DC reactor.
Chapter 4
Refer to Table 4-9 for its selection.
Table 4-9 Recommended selection table of DC reactor
Wiring of the Inverter
Inverter Type
Power
Current
Inductance
AS180
(kW)
(A)
(mH)
4T02P2
2.2
DCR-0010-6M30-0.4DC
10
6.3
4T03P7
3.7
DCR-0010-6M30-0.4DC
10
6.3
4T05P5
5.5
DCR-0015-3M60-0.4DC
15
3.6
4T07P5
7.5
DCR-0020-3M60-0.4DC
20
3.6
4T0011
11
DCR-0030-2M00-0.4DA
30
2
4T0015
15
DCR-0040-2M00-0.4DA
40
2
4T18P5
18.5
DCR-0040-1M30-0.4DA
40
1.3
4T0022
22
DCR-0050-1M08-0.4DA
50
1.08
4T0030
30
DCR-0065-0M80-0.4DA
65
0.8
Recommended Type
46
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
4.2 Wiring of Inverter Terminals
Chapter 4
Note: terminals of the inverter with different power level are the same in terms of position and
arrangement except for those power input/output terminals. We take 11kW inverter as an example in
the figure.
4.2.1 Wiring Diagram of the Inverter Terminals
Basic wiring diagram of the inverter with no built-in DC reactor and built-in braking unit is
shown as Figure 4-7.
47
Wiring of the Inverter
Fig4-6 Internal view of the inverter
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Connecting to external
DC reactor allowed
Braking
resistor
Short
block
+1
R/L1
3-phrase power supply
400V level:380~460VAC
50/60H
+2
B
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
M
Chapter 4
AS180 Series V/F Inverter
M0 Multi-function analog output 0
M1 Multi-function analog output 1
0V
Slide switch
Programmable multi-function
input signal
M0/SW6
I
U
M1/SW5
I
U
PE
Wiring of the Inverter
P1
P2
X0
X1
PTC Protection point
X2
X3
X4
Y0 Programmable collector open output 0
X5
X6
Y1 Programmable collector open output 1
XV
YC
24(+24V)
1A
Programmable relay output 1
1B
2A
Programmable relay output 2
2B
XC
XC
PE
analog input 0
(-10V~+10V or 0~20mA)
analog input 1
(-10V~+10V or 0~20mA)
V+
A0
A1
0V
3A
3B Programmable relay output 3
3C
4A
4B Programmable relay output 4
4C
Slide switch
A0/SW4
I
U
A1/SW3
I
U
shielding line
VModbus communication interface
shielded twisted pair
A+
B-
twisted pair
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Figure 4-7 Wiring schematic of high performance vector inverter terminals (30kW and below)
Note: input power in the diagram is given taking 3-phase power input as an example, 3-phase
380-460V power input for 400V grade inverter.
Basic wiring diagram of the inverter with built-in DC reactor and no built-in braking unit is
shown as Figure 4-8.
48
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Built-in DC reactor allowed
3-phrase power supply
400V level:380~460VAC
200V level: 220V/AC
50/60H
+
R/L1
-
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
M
AS180 Series V/F Inverter
M0
M1
0V
M0/SW6
I
U
M1/SW5
I
U
Programmable multi-function
input signal
PE
P1
P2
X0
X1
Multi-function analog
output 0
Multi-function analog
output 1
PTC Protection point
Chapter 4
Slide switch
X2
Y0
X4
X5
Y1
X6
XV
1A
Programmable relay output 1
1B
2A
Programmable relay output 2
2B
XC
XC
PE
A0
analog input 0
(-10V~+10V or 0~20mA)
A1
analog input 1
(-10V~+10V or 0~20mA)
0V
Slide switch
A0/SW4
I
U
A1/SW3
I
U
3A
3B Programmable relay output 3
3C
4A
4B Programmable relay output 4
4C
shielding line
VModbus
communication
interface
Programmable collector open
output 1
YC
24(+24V)
V+
Programmable collector open
output 0
shielded twisted pair
A+
B-
twisted pair
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Figure 4-8 Wiring schematic 2 of inverter terminals (30kW above)
Notes:
1.Optional analog voltage and current signals can be input to A0/A1 simultaneously.
2.This inverter isn’t provided with braking unit, but with the terminals for external connection.
4.2.2 Terminal wiring precaution
Important
a) Wiring should meet standard of electrician regulation.
b) Ensure wiring is correctly and reliably after finish of wire connection. Need to check-up:

Is wiring correct?
49
Wiring of the Inverter
X3
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
c)

Is any loose piece, like wire clipping, screw left in the inverter?

Any loosing screw?

Does the stripped wire of the terminal parts contact to any other terminal?
AS180 series inverter equips (30kW and below) inside braking component. But it needs to
connect external braking resistor. Braking resistor should be installed between terminal B and
+
○2. Please don’t install them anywhere else, or it may damage braking resistor and inverter.
Chapter 4
AS180 series inverter equips (greater than 30kW) outside braking component.
d)
AS180 series inverter equips (30kW and below) Select DC reactor is installed between terminal
+
○1 and ○
+2, and short block between those terminals needs to be taken off. AS180 series
inverter equips (greater than 30kW) inside DC reactor.
e)
For AS180 series inverter equips (30kW and below), if bus low voltage running function is
Wiring of the Inverter
needed, the emergency 220V power supply needs to be connected at terminals R0 and T0 on
extended power board. A 48V DC power supply need to be connected between terminal R and S
at the same time. No extra connection needs if there is no bus low voltage running function.
f)
Inverter grounding point PE is recommended to ground to specialized grounding spot. The
grounding resistance should be below 10Ω.
g)
Keep the grounding cable as short as possible.
If there is any wire alteration required after power on, disconnect the power supply first. The
capacity in main circuit needs a certain time to discharge. To avoid any hazard, charging indicator
must be off, and then the DC voltage on charging capacity should be measured by DC voltmeter and is
below a safety voltage of 24V before any further work.
4.3 Main Circuit Terminal Wiring
4.3.1 Line-up of Main Circuit Terminals
+1
○
+2
○
B
-
○
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
a) 30kW and below
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
○
b) 37kW~75kW
50
+
○
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
W/T3
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
c)
U/T1
-
○
+
○
V/T2
W/T3
90kW~400kW
Fig. 4.9 The line-up of connection terminals of the main circuit
Chapter 4
4.3.2 Main Circuit Terminal Label and Function Specification
Function specification for main circuit terminals, see Table 4.10.
Table 4-10 Function specification of main circuit terminals
Function Specification
+1
○
May connect external DC reactor. Short connected by factory
+2
○
default
+2
○
Connect to external braking resistor
B
+2/○
○
+
DC Bus cable positive/negative output terminal. May connect
-
○
external DC reactor or common DC bus.
R/L1
S/L2
Main circuit input AC power supply, connecting 3 phase input
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
Inverter output, connecting 3 phase sync/async motor
W/T3
Ground terminal, connect the protective ground, when the 400V
class ground resistance is not greater than 4Ω
4.3.3 Main Circuit Wire Specification
600V insulated copper conductor power supply cable is used. Specification of wire and
tightening torque, see Table 4.11.
Table 4-11 Wire Specification and Tightening Torque
Model
Connectable wire
Recommended wire
Tightening
AS180
specification(mm2)
specification(mm2)
Torque (N.m)
4T02P2
1.5~2.5
2.5
2.7
4T03P7
1.5~2.5
2.5
2.7
51
Wiring of the Inverter
Terminal Label
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 4
Wiring of the Inverter
Model
Connectable wire
Recommended wire
Tightening
AS180
specification(mm2)
specification(mm2)
Torque (N.m)
4T05P5
2.5~4
4
2.7
4T07P5
4~8
6
2.7
4T0011
4~8
6
2.7
4T0015
4~8
6
2.7
4T18P5
8~16
16
3
4T0022
8~16
16
3
4T0030
25~35
25
3
4T0037
35~50
35
6
4T0045
50~70
50
6
4T0055
70~95
70
6
4T0075
95
95
6
4T0090
85~115
95
10
4T0110
85~115
95
10
4T0132
95~135
120
10
4T0160
165~205
185
10
4T0185
205~265
240
10
4T0200
85~115(x2P)
95x2P
10
4T0220
85~115(x2P)
95x2P
10
4T0250
125~175(x2P)
150x2P
10
4T0280
125~175(x2P)
150x2P
17
4T0315
125~175(x2P)
150x2P
17
4T0355
85~115(x4P)
95x4P
17
4T0400
85~115(x4P)
95x4P
17
The wire specifications are determined under the ambient temperature of 50℃, and the wire
allowable temperature of 75℃.
Inverter main circuit uses open terminal block. Round crimp terminal should be used for open
terminal block. To select round crimp terminal, see Table 4-12.
52
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Table 4-12 Round crimp terminal
Cross Section Area(mm2)
M3.5
1.25/3.5
M4
1.25/4
M3.5
1.25/3.5
M4
1.25/4
M3.5
1.25/3.5
M4
1.25/4
M3.5
2/3.5
M4
2/4
M5
2/5
M6
2/6
M8
2/8
M4
5.5/4
M5
5.5/5
M6
5.5/6
M8
5.5/8
M5
8/5
M6
8/6
M8
8/8
M6
14/6
M8
14/8
M6
22/6
M8
22/8
M8
38/8
M8
60/8
M10
60/10
80
M10
80/10
100
M10
100/10
120
M12
120/12
185
M12
185/12
240
M12
240/12
300
M12
300/12
380
M12
380/12
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
3.5/5.5
8
14
22
30/38
50/60
Voltage drop of wire should be fully considered while selecting the wire cross section.
Typically maintains voltage within 2% of rated voltage, the cross section of wire needs to
be increased if voltage drop is too heavy. Formula for calculating of voltage drop is:
Line to line voltage drop(V)=
3 * Line resistance(Ω)* Current (A)
53
Wiring of the Inverter
Round crimp terminal
Chapter 4
Terminal Screw
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
4.3.4 Detailed Wiring Description for Terminals of the Main Loop
4.3.4.1
Power Supply
The inverter must be connected to the protected ground. Considering the high leakage current
(exceeding 3.5mA), protective grounding must be taken for the purpose of observing the related
current regulations.
Chapter 4
4.3.4.2 Grounding Terminal (PE)
■
Grounding terminal is recommended to ground to designated grounding spot, must be
grounded reliably. The grounding resistance should be below 10Ω;
Wiring of the Inverter
■
Don’t share grounding cable with welding machine, or other power devices;
■
Grounding cable should comply with the technical standard for electric equipment, and
should be as short as possible. The current leakage will cause instability of voltage potential
at grounding terminal if the distance between grounding cable and grounding spot is too far;
■
Recommend to use specific green-yellow ground cable; see Table. 4-13.
Table 4-13 The cross section of grounding conductor
■
Installation:the cross section of conductor
Minimum cross section of grounding conductor
S(mm2)
Smin(mm2)
S≤16
S
16<S≤35
16
35<S
S/2
When multi-inverter are grounded, try to avoid looping the connection. Methods of
multi-inverter grounding connection, see Fig. 4.10.
Fig. 4.10 Methods of multi-inverter grounding connection
Incorrect wiring:
If voltage of the input line is applied on (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3), the inverter will be
damaged.
54
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Examine power connection before the inverter is powered on.
If it needs to replace another inverter, please confirm that all wiring to the inverter
conforms to the wiring instruction in this manual.
Nonobservance of the instruction manual will lead to death or serious injury.
4.3.4.3 DC +48V Power Supply Terminal(○
+2, ○
-)
In case of power failure, storage battery may input +48V DC power supply to inverter via
terminal (○
+2 ○
-). It can operate the motor at a low speed and protect the machine from
shock.
Chapter 4
■
4.3.4.4 Power Supply Input terminals for Main Circuit (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Three phase AC power supply cable connects the main circuit terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
via the breaker. The phase sequence of input power doesn’t relate to the order of terminals
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. Any terminal can be connected.
■
A noise filter can be installed at the power supply side in order to reduce transmission and
radiation interference created by inverter. The noise filter can reduce the electromagnetic
noise intruded from the power wire. It can also reduce the electromagnetic noise sent from
inverter to power cable.
Please use the specialized noise filter for inverter only.
+2 )
4.3.4.5 External DC Reactor Terminals (○
+1, ○
■
External DC reactor can be added to improve the power factor of inverter. Terminal ○
+1, ○
+
2 is short connected by short block by the factory pre-setting. To connect DC reactor, short
block needs to be removed first, then proceeds the connection.
■
Do not take off the short block if no DC reactor is used, or inverter may work abnormally.
Connecting short block, see Fig. 4.11.
Short Block
+1
○
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
B
+2
○
-
○
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+
E
Fig. 4.11 Connection diagram for short block
Connecting external DC reactor, see Fig. 4.12.
55
Wiring of the Inverter
■
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
External DC reactor
+1
○
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
B
+2
○
-
○
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+
E
Chapter 4
Fig. 4.12 Connection diagram for external DC reactor
4.3.4.6 External Braking Resistor Terminal(○
+2,B)
■
AS180 inverter (≤30kW) is installed a built-in braking unit. External braking resistor is
necessary to absorb released energy by motor braking. Table 2-2 400V Inverter Braking
Wiring of the Inverter
Resistor” lists the specification of braking resistor.
■
Braking resistor is installed between terminal ○
+2 and B.
■
In order to maintain the breaking resistor working, the heat dissipation characteristic of
braking resistor should be fully considered, and it should be well ventilated.
■
The cable length of braking resistor connection can’t be longer than 5m.
External braking resistor connection, see Fig. 4.13.
Braking resistor
Short circuit block
+1
○
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+2
○
B
-
○
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+
Fig. 4.13 Connection diagram for external braking resistor
4.3.4.7
■
Terminals of the External Braking Unit(○
+,○
-)
When an outer braking unit is required, its ○
+ and ○- will be corresponding to (○
+,○
-) of the
inverter one to one, with braking resistor being connected at its terminals BR1 and BR2.
■
Length of the wire between (○
+,○
-) of the inverter and (○
+,○
-) of the braking unit shall
be less than 5m, while that of the wiring for BR1 & BR2 of the braking unit and the
braking resistor shall be less than 10m.
Polarity of ○
+ and ○
- won’t be reversed, without braking resistor directly
connected, otherwise it may cause inverter damage or fire.
56
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Braking resistor
Chapter 4
4.3.4.8
Connection of Energy Feedback Unit
Our RG series energy feedback unit is able to feedback the electric power generated by the
generator under regenerative braking to the grid. RG series energy feedback adopts IGBT as rectified
feedback, comparing to the traditional 3-phase antiparallel bridge rectifier unit, its harmonic
distortional component is less than 5% fundamental wave, with small pollution to the grid.
Energy feedback device
iAStar RG
R
S
T
Short circuit block
R/L1
+1
+2
+ B
-
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Figure 4-15 Diagram of outer energy feedback device
4.3.4.9 Inverter Output Terminal (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)
■
Inverter output terminal U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 connects motor terminal U, V, W. If motor runs
in wrong direction, please switch any two wires at inverter output or motor terminals.
■
Never connect power supply input to inverter output U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 directly.
■
Never ground, short the output terminals;
■
Never install capacitors/surge filter at inverter output side, or it may cause the inverter
57
Wiring of the Inverter
Figure 4-14 Diagram of outer braking unit
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
overheat, or damage due to the output of higher harmonics.
■
Never connect capacitor at inverter output side, see Fig. 4.16.
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
M
Chapter 4
Fig. 4.16 Never connect capacitor at inverter output side
4.4 Anti-interference Measures
Wiring of the Inverter
4.4.1 Connect Specific Noise Filter at Output
In order to restrain noise at inverter output side, a specific noise filter can be installed. To install a
filter at output side, see Fig. 4.17.
Power
supply
Inverter
Noise
Filter
M
Emission
interference
Controlling
device
Radio
Fig. 4.17 Connection diagram for noise filter at output side
4.4.2 Surge Suppressor at Output Side
When the inverter connects to an inductive load equipment (electromagnetic contactor, relay and
solenoid valve etc), please be sure to apply a surge suppressor on its coil, shown as Figure 4-18.
inductive
load
DC 24V inductive
load
AC 220V
inductive
load
AC 220V
voltage dependent resistor
Figure 4-18 Application of surge suppressor in the inductive load
4.4.3 Wiring Arrangement of the Main Loop
In order to control the radiated interference from output side of the inverter and enhance the
anti-interference performance, enough distance shall be guaranteed between them and as far as
possible, especially when the cable is laid in parallel or extended for a long distance. When the signal
cable must pass through the power cable, then it will vertically pass through it. Wiring arrangement
58
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
schematic of the main loop is shown as Figures 4-19 and 4-20.
Motor cable
Power/motor
Power cable
cable
Control/signal
Control/signal
cable
cable
Chapter 4
Figure 4-19 Wiring arrangement 1 of the main loop
Metal
tube
金属管
Power
电
M
Inverter
变频器
supply
源
Control equipment
控制设备
Figure 4-20 Wiring arrangement 2 of the main loop
Generally, control cable must be shielded cable, and shielding wire mesh must be connected to
the metal case of inverter through the cable clamps on both sides, shown as Figure 4-21.
Casing
Casing
Casing
Casing
Figure 4-21 Contrast of grounding mode
4.4.4 Proper Method against Interference
To have better anti-interference method, both inverter input and output sides are installed noise
filter, and inverter is shielded in enclosed steel cabinet. See Fig. 4-22.
Steel Cabinet
Power
Supply
Noise
filter
Metal pipe
Noise
filter
Inverter
Fig. 4-22 Better anti-interference method
59
M
Wiring of the Inverter
距离30cm以上
30cm
above
Signal
line
信号线
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
4.4.5 Relationship between Length of Wire and Carrier Frequency
The distributed capacitance on long cable between inverter and motor will increase higher
harmonic current leakage. It may trigger output over-current protection, and causes negative impact on
peripheral equipment and motor. The length of cable between inverter and motor shall not be longer
than 100m. Otherwise output side filter and reactor is needed, and carrier frequency needs to be tuned
to P02.14 by referring to following table.
Chapter 4
Table 4.14 The cable length between inverter and motor
Wire Distance between inverter and motor Less than 100m
Carrier frequency
Below 8kHz
Over 100m
Below 5kHz
Wiring of the Inverter
4.5 Control Circuit Terminal Wiring
4.5.1 Line-up of Control Circuit Terminals
Layout of control circuit terminals, see Fig. 4.23.
LED shown PTC
over-temperature
protection status
LED shown
Modbus
communication
status
Termination
resistors
Control circuit
terminal
Signal type
selection
Fig. 4.23 Picture of control circuit terminals
A0/A1 is able to input analog voltage signal (-10V~+10V) or analog current signal (0~20mA),
with its input mode to be determined by the toggle switch of each port.
M0/M1 is able to output analog voltage signal (-10V~+10V) or analog current signal (0~20mA),
with its output mode to be determined by the toggle switch of each port.
60
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
When the switch is toggled to U, its corresponding port will be at voltage working mode; while it
is toggled to I, its corresponding port will be at current working mode. Toggle switch of I/O
voltage/current is arranged as Figure 4-24:
Chapter 4
Figure 4-24 Selection detail of signal type
Wiring of the Inverter
4.5.2 Control Circuit Terminal Label
Labels of control circuit terminal, see Fig. 4.25.
Fig. 4.25 Control circuit terminal label
4.5.3 Functional Description for Terminals of the Control Circuit
Functional description for terminals of the control loop refers to Table 4-15.
Table 4-15 Functional description for terminals of the control circuit
Name
Terminal
X0
X1
Digital
X2
input
terminal
X3
X4
X5
Signal
Remarks
Multi-function input 0(Function
code: P30.00)
Multi-function input 1(Function
code: P30.01)
Input signal valid when connect closed.
Function is select by function code P30 group.
Multi-function input 2(Function
Specification for digital input circuit:
code: P30.02)
Multi-function input 3(Function
code: P30.03)
Multi-function input 4(Function
code: P30.04)
Multi-function input 5(Function
code: P30.05)
61
Internal power
+24VDC
Max. load current
100mA
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
X6
Multi-function input 6(Function
code: P30.06)
24
Internal +24VDC power output
XV
Input common terminal 24V
XC
Input common terminal 0V
Chapter 4
A0
Multi-function analog input 0
External analog voltage/current input,
(Function code: P32.01)
Analog voltage level range: -10+10V or 0~10V,
Rin=34Ω,
A1
Analog input
Multi-function analog input 1
Analog current level range: 0~20mA or 4~20mA,
(Function code: P32.07)
Rin=120Ω
Wiring of the Inverter
can be used as input signal for given analog speed
terminal
Analog input +10VDC at power output side, max
V+
+10V Power output
V-
-10V Power input
0V
Reference ground for analog input Reference ground for analog input
allowed current: 20mA
Analog input -10VDC at power output side, max
allowed current: 20mA
Programmable relay output function can be
1A
1B
Relay output
terminal
2A
2B
Programmable relay output
selected from function code P31 group..
(Function code: P31.00)
The contact specification for a pair of switching
NO(Normally Open contact)
contacts is as follows:
Item
Specification
Programmable relay output
Rate capacity
Inductance:1.5A/250VAC
(Function code: P31.01)
Switch frequency
120/min
NO(Normally Open
Failure rate “P” 10mA/5V
Response time
Less than 10ms
Programmable relay output
3A
3B
3C
(Function code: P31.02)
Programmable relay output function can be selected
3A-3B:NO(Normally Open
from function code P31 group..
contact)
The contact specification for a pair of switching contacts
3B-3C:NC(Normally Closed
is as follows:
contact)
62
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Programmable relay output
Specification
Item
(Function code: P31.03)
Resistive:
4A
4A-4B:NO(Normally Open
4B
contact)
4C
4B-4C:NC(Normally Closed
4.5A 250VAC/30VAC
Rate capacity
contact)
Inductance:
0.4A 250VAC/30VDC
Switch frequency
Failure rate “P” 10mA/5V
120/min
Transistor
open
terminals
Y1
YC
M0
Analog
output
M1
terminal
0V
Programmable open collector
output 1 (Function Code: P31.04)
Programmable open collector
Programmable open collector output function can be
output 2 (Function Code: P31.05) select by function code P31。
Capable drive: less than DC30V, 50mA
Programmable open collector
output common terminal
Programmable analog output 1
Analog voltage/current output:
(Function code: P33.00)
Analog voltage output: -10+10V or 0~10V, RL≥1kΩ,
Programmable analog output 2
Analog current output: 0~20mA or 4~20mA, RL≤500Ω
(Function code: P33.03)
It can output to monitor or other device input.
Reference ground of analog
Analog output signal reference ground
output signal
Model of the matched temperature sensor: PT1000
High
temperature
protection
P1, P2
High temperature protection point: 120℃
PTC functional connection port
ON: normal temperature
Status indicator
(Function code P30.07)
(green) D35
terminal
OFF: high temperature protection
Signal terminal of Modbus communication
A+
Modbus communication signal +
Yellow
(TX)
Communica
Modbus
tion status
communicati
indicator
on terminal B-
Modbus communication signal-
D36
ON: IO board is sending
data to the bus
OFF: IO board isn’t in
sending status
Green
ON: IO board is receiving
(TX)
data from the bus
D37
OFF: IO board isn’t in
receiving status
+5
Signal power +5V
Communication signal isolating power 5V, 100mA
SC
Signal ground
Modbus communication signal ground
63
Wiring of the Inverter
collector
Y0
Chapter 4
Less than 10ms
Response time
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Shielding layer will be grounded via RC loop in the
AE
RC grounding terminal
places with long communication line and serious
interference
Grounding
terminal
Direct grounding, suitable for the places with good
PE
Direct grounding terminal
grounding condition. Analog and shielding layer of the
communication line are grounded.
Chapter 4
4.5.4 Control Circuit Wire Specification
600V plastic insulated copper conductor cable is used for control circuit. Specification of wire
and tightening torque, see Table 4.16.
Wiring of the Inverter
Table 4.16 Wire Specification and Tightening Torque
Model
Allowable wire (mm2)
Recommended wire (mm2)
Tightening Torque (N.m)
Whole AS180 series
0.75~1
0.75
1.5
The wire sizes are determined under the ambient temperature of 50℃, wire temperature of 75℃.
Control circuit connection is recommended to use bar shaped terminal. Specification of bar
shaped terminal, see Table 4.17.
Table 4.17 Specification – Bar shaped terminal
Cross Section area mm2(AWG) d1(mm) d2(mm) L(mm)
0.25(24)
0.8
2
12.5
0.5(20)
1.1
2.5
14
0.75(18)
1.3
2.8
14
1.5(16)
1.8
3.4
14
2(14)
2.3
4.2
14
Illustration
4.5.5 Detailed Wiring Description for Terminals of the Control Loop
4.5.5.1 Digital Input Terminal
The specific connection mode:

Use the internal +24V power supply of the inverter, the outer controller is passive contact
connection mode
64
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
AS180 inverter
User controller
Chapter 4
Use the internal +24V power supply of the inverter, the outer controller is NPN sink
current connection mode
AS180 inverter
User controller

Use the internal +24V power supply of the inverter, the outer controller is PNP source
current connection mode.
User controller
AS180 inverter
Note: be sure to remove the short circuit lug between terminals +24V and XV, and short
65
Wiring of the Inverter

Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
connect XC and XV.

Use the external power supply connection mode, the outer controller is NPN sink current
connection mode.
User controller
AS180 inverter
Chapter 4
Wiring of the Inverter
Note: be sure to remove the short circuit lug between terminals +24V and XV.

Use the external power supply, outer controller is PNP source current connection mode.
AS180 inverter
User controller
Note: Be sure to remove the short circuit lug between terminals +24V and XV.
4.5.5.2
Analog Input Terminal
There are two input ports A0 and A1 for analog signal in this inverter, with signal type of optional
voltage/current; voltage signal range -10V ~ +10V and current signal range 0~20mA.
When using analog input signals, parameters from P32.00 to P32.11 can be set to select
parameters, such as gain, offset, and signal filtering time of each corresponding signal input port, so
that analog input port can be use better. Refer to chapter “7.6.3” in detail.
The cable connecting analog signal and inverter should be as short as possible (no longer than
30m) while connecting analog signal, and should use shielded cable. Shielded cable should be
grounded and connected to 0V terminal on inverter analog output.
66
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Shield wires to be used
Analog voltage input
(-10V~+10V)
VR
AS180 inverter
V+
A0
1k~5k ohm
V-
Fig. 4.26 Diagram for analog signal shielded cable connection
Chapter 4
0V
In Fig. 4.26, analog voltage signal is supplied by inverter, and its voltage range is -10V ~ +10V. In
signal, 0~10V is taken in most cases, the connection diagram, see Fig. 4.27. If it is current signal,
0mA~24mA is taken in most cases, the connection diagram, see Fig. 4.28.
Upper controller
Speed
reference
0V
Use shielded cable
Analog voltage input
(0V~10V)
AS180 inverter
A0
0V
V0
Fig. 4.27 Diagram for AIO cable connection with voltage signal
Upper controller
Use shielded cable
speed/torque
AS500 Inverter
A0/A1
Analog current
input(0~20mA)
0V
0V
500Ω
0.5W
PE
Fig. 4.28 Diagram for AIO cable connection with current signal
4.5.5.3 Digital Output Terminal
Digital output terminal has two parts, relay contact output terminal and open collector output
terminal. Each digital output terminal can define input function by setting parameter based on function
code P31. The value of code P31 ranges from 0 to 63. Each number refers to Parameter group P31.
Notice: Open collector output USES the external power supply, note the polarity of the power
67
Wiring of the Inverter
reality, most analog voltage signal is supplied by controller who sends out analog signal. If it is voltage
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
supply for connection to the external power supply. The output of the specifications of the power
supply for the maximum voltage + 30 VDC, maximum load current 50 mA, beyond which
specification is in danger of damage output circuit.
■
Use the external +24V power supply of the inverter, multifunctional collector open output
terminal connection mode
AS180 inverter
Chapter 4
Relay
Wiring of the Inverter
Note: if terminal Y0 or Y1 is damaged when this wiring mode is adopted, be sure to confirm
whether polarity of the outer diode is correct.
4.5.5.4 Multi-function Analog Output Terminal
Multi-function analog output can define input function by setting parameter based on function
code P33.00 and P33.03. The value of code ranges from 0 to 16. Each number refers to the following
function and the corresponding output (P33.00 refers to M0, P33.03 refers to M1):

no definition;

1:
output current;

2:
output voltage;

3:
torque given ;

4:
busbar voltage;

5:
output total power;

6.
output active power;

7:
speed(unsigned);

8:
given speed (signed);

9:
feedback of speed regulator(signed);

10: heating rate

11: radiator temperature

12: Analog A0

13: Analog A1

14: Analog A2
See chapter 7, “7.6.4 Analog output function Parameter I” for more information.
68
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
4.5.6 Other Remarks for Wiring
Control terminal wiring must keep far away from power cable in main circuit, or wrong action
may be triggered due to the electromagnetic interference.
Chapter 4
Wiring of the Inverter
69
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 5 Commissioning and Test Run
In the following chapters, noun description relating to control, running and status of the inverter
will be mentioned many times. Please carefully read the contents in this chapter prior to use of the
product, to correctly understand and properly use the functions mentioned in later chapters.
!Danger
remove the inverter casing, otherwise it may cause electric shock.
If restart for outage function is set for the inverter, don’t close to the rotating mechanical
equipment, to avoid personal injury caused by starting the mechanical equipment when the inverter is
Chapter 5
Close input power only after the inverter casing has been installed. After electrification, don’t
powered on.
cause electric shock or burn.
Please be sure to confirm the permissible application scope of the motor and mechanical
equipment before the inverter starts the motor and mechanical equipment, otherwise it may cause
personal injury.
!Caution
Don’t examine the measurement signal when the inverter is running, otherwise it may cause
equipment damage.
Be sure not to change the parameter setting of the inverter at will, otherwise the proper operation
effect can’t be met, with damage to the transmission equipment.
Be sure to have switching commissioning firstly before run command channel of the inverter is
switched, otherwise it may cause equipment damage and personal injury.
5.1 Run Command Given
As a basic tool for the inverter operation, manipulator is used to observe different status and fault
code of the inverter, as well as set and view its various parameters. In this chapter, basic operation
method of the manipulator is described in details.
5.1.1 Run Command Channel of the Inverter
It assigns the inverter to receive run command: physical channel for start, stop and so on. The run
command channels are divided into:
Operation panel: control by use of RUN, STOP and LOC/REM keys on it
71
Commissioning and Test Run
Don’t touch the braking resistor when dynamic braking resistor is provided, otherwise it may
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Control terminal: control by use of control terminals X0~X6 (digital) and A0~A1 (analog)
Communication port: start and stop the control by use of control terminals A+ and B- (Modbus)
with upper computer.
Selection of command channel can be set through function code P10.02.
Note: before the command channel is switched, be sure to have switching commissioning firstly,
otherwise it may cause equipment damage and personal injury.
5.1.2 Frequency Given Channel of the Inverter
There are 4 frequency given physical channels when AS180 is in normal operation mode:
Chapter 5
Operation panel ▲ and ▼ keys given,
Terminal given,
Communication given,
Analog voltage or current given.
Commissioning and Test Run
5.1.3 Working Status of the Inverter
Working status of AS180 includes stop status and running status.
Stop status: after the inverter is powered on and initialized, if no any run command is input or
stop command is executed during running, then it will enter stop status immediately.
Running status: the inverter will enter running status after it receives run command.
5.1.4 Run Mode of the Inverter
Inching run shares the highest priority.
Closed loop run: selection function of the closed loop is effective (P51.00=1). The inverter will
choose closed loop run mode, to have PID regulation based on given and feedback quantity (refer to
function code in P51 group).
Multi-speed run: select multi-frequency 0 ~ 7 (P41.00 ~ P41.07) by use of combined open/close
the multifunctional terminals (functions 3, 4 and 5) to realize multi-speed run.
Normal run: the simple open loop run mode.
5.2 Operation Guide
As a basic tool for the inverter operation, manipulator is used to observe different status and fault
code of the inverter, as well as set and view its various parameters. In this chapter, basic operation
method of the manipulator is described in details.
The user can execute the following through the operation panel:

Motor status monitoring

Motor self-tuning
72
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual

Motor run control (start/stop, speed, forward/reverse)

View and answer the fault or alarm

Set and modify the parameters

Switching between local mode and remote mode
5.2.1 Function for Individual Parts of the Operator
Refer to the Fig. 5-1 for each parts of operator and its function.
Chapter 5
LED Indicator
LED Display
Commissioning and Test Run
LCD Screen
Increment
Left
Right
ESC
Enter
STOP/RESET
RUN
LO/RE
Decrement
Figure 5-1 Names and functions of each parts of the operator
5.2.2 LED Indicator
The operator have 4 LED indicators, D1 (RUN), D2 (F/R), D3 (LO/RE) and D4 (ERR). These
indicators show the motor status. Refer to Table 5.1 for the relationships between indicators and motor
status.
Table 5.1 Motor status indication
Status
D1(RUN)
D2(F/R)
D3(LO/RE)
D4(ERR)
Forward
On
On
Off
Off
Reverse
On
Off
Off
Off
73
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Fault/Warning
Off
——
——
Flashing
Panel operation
On
On/off
On
Off
5.2.3 LED Digital Tube
There are 4 LED digital tubes below the indicators and displaying real time motor speed at the
default interface. The content of display can be changed by selecting different parameters.
5.2.4 LCD Display
In middle of operator you can find a LCD screen. This is the main screen to display and set the
Chapter 5
parameter of the inverter, and to view the fault code of the inverter.
5.2.4 Keyboard
There are 9 keys at lower part of the operator. Function of those keys, see Table 5.2
Commissioning and Test Run
Table 5.2 Key function
Key
Name
Right
Left
Increment
Decrement
E NT E R
Enter
E SC
ESC
RUN
RUN
STOP
RESET
STOP/RESET
LO/RE
LO/RE
Function
In 【Function Select】mode: To select the next function group;
In 【Parameter setting】mode: To move the cursor to the right;
In 【Function Select】mode: To select the previous function group;
In 【Parameter setting】mode: To move the cursor to the left;
In 【Function Select】mode: To select the previous function code;
In 【Parameter setting】mode: To increase the value;
In 【Function Select】mode: To select the next function code;
In 【Parameter setting】mode: To decrease the value;
In 【Monitoring】mode: To enter the function selecting interface;
In 【Function Select】mode: To enter the selected function interface;
In 【Function Select】mode: back to 【Monitoring】 mode;
In all operational sites: beck to 【Function Select】mode.
In LOCAL control mode: “RUN” function;
In LOCAL control mode: “STOP” function;
In Fault stop status: “RESET” function
Operation mode switch between operator (LOCAL) and control circuit
terminal (REMOTE).
5.3 Operation
Monitoring status, function selection and parameter setting are provided on the operator. Menu of
the operator is displayed in Chinese and English, which is set as Chinese at factory, but it may be
74
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
switched to English by setting the parameter value in “language selection” of the advanced menu.
5.3.1 Power On and Initialization
When the operator is powered on for the first time, it needs to adjust brightness of the operator
LCD via left shift key and right shift key, with the former to reduce brightness, while the latter to
increase brightness.
After the operator is powered on, there is several seconds for its initialization. During this process,
operator LCD will display [startup picture].
Startup picture is as the following:
Chapter 5
Hardware Version
Software Version
5.3.2 Display After Power On
Screen shows “Monitoring” state 5 seconds after power on. The screen default displays the
current reference speed (Vref), feedback speed (V/Fbk) and current states (Irms).
5.3.3 【Monitor State】 In Detail
Monitoring interface can be switched by pressing
, or
in 【Monitor
State】. 14 real time data of motor status are displayed in screen by default. These data is for display
only but can’t be modified.
Table 5.3 Comparison table for default operation data
Display
Name
Explanation
Factory
Range
Unit
×
rpm
×
Default
Vobj
Target speed
Display the target speed of the motor
Vref
Given speed
Display the given speed
V/Fbk
Feedback speed
Display feedback speed of the motor
×
rpm
×
Irms
Output current
Display output current
×
A
×
Torq
Output torque
Display output torque
×
%
×
Display zero servo torque at starting
×
%
×
Tzero
Zero servo
torque
Udc
DC Bus voltage
Display DC voltage of inverter main circuit
×
V
×
Uout
Output voltage
Display inverter output voltage
×
V
×
75
Remarks
Commissioning and Test Run
Note: the screen enters monitoring status after the software version number is displayed.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
A0
AI1
A0 input
Display input voltage of inverter analog
voltage
input 0 (A0)
A1 input
Display input voltage of inverter analog
voltage
input 1 (A1)
Process closed
PIDRef
loop PID given
×
V
×
×
V
×
V
Display the current PID given value
×
loop PID
×
ault)
Process closed
PIDFbk
(def
V
Display the current PID feedback value
×
feedback
(def
×
ault)
Chapter 5
Display the input status of terminals
DI
Input X0-X7
X0-X6, as “XXXXXXXX”, where “X” =
status
0, indicating no input, “X” = 1, indicating
×
×
×
×
×
input
Output K1-K4
Commissioning and Test Run
×
DO
and Y0、Y1
Display the output status of terminals
K1-K4, Y0, Y1, as “XXXXXX”, where
“X” = 0, indicating no output, “X” = 1,
status
indicating output
5.3.4 【Control Panel】 In Detail
Press
LO/RE
in “Monitoring” interface can switch operation mode between “Monitoring” and
“Control Panel”. In “Control Panel” mode LED indicator D3 will be on. Press
RUN
at that time
may control inverter into operation state, LED indicator D1 in operator will be on. Inverter enters in
stop state by pressing
STOP
RESET
, LED indicator D1 will be off. Press
and
in “Control
Panel” interface can switch the monitored contents. In this interface there are 2 panel adjustable
parameters and 4 real time operation data. Panel adjustable speed (Vref) and motor moving direction
(Vdir) can be modified, other 4 data are displayed only but can’t be modified.
Table 5.4 Comparison table for control panel data
Display
Vref
Name
Panel controlled
speed
Explanation
Range
Set speed reference in panel operation
0.00~
300.00
Unit
Factory
Default
Hz
5.00
V/Fbk
Feedback speed
Display motor feedback speed
×
Hz
×
Irms
Output current
Display output current
×
A
×
Motor moving
Set motor rotating to forward or reverse
direction
direction
0~1
×
1
×
V
×
Vdir
Udc
DC Bus voltage
Display DC voltage of inverter main
circuit
76
Remarks
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Uout
Output voltage
Display inverter output voltage
×
V
×
5.3.5 Operation Mode
Operator has 5 operating modes. They are 【Parameter Setting】, 【Motor Tuning】, 【Fault
Check】 , 【Parameter Processing】 and 【Modified Parameters】. In any monitoring interface, press
E NT E R
can enter into following “Function Select” interface:
* 1: Parameter Setting
2: Motor Tuning
Chapter 5
3: Fault Check
4: Parameter Processing
5: Modified Parameters
5.3.5.1【Parameter Setting】
chapter 6.
In 【Parameter Setting】mode, to select parameter group by pressing
parameter code by pressing
or
. Press
E NT E R
or
, select
to confirm the parameter to be modified.
A cursor that indicats the position to be modified is displayed on selected parameter. Press
or
to move the cursor and change the modified position, press
increase/decrease the modified value. Then press
invalid if
E NT E R
is not pressed. Press
E SC
E NT E R
or
to
to confirm the modification, modification is
and return to previous menu.
5.3.5.2 【Motor Tuning】
1: Parameter Setting
* 2: Motor Tuning
3: Fault Check
4: Parameter Processing
5: Modified Parameters
In 【Motor Tuning】 mode, the parameters for motor (asynchronous) and encoder phase angle
(sync. Motor) can be retrieved manually by self-learning. Self-learning mode can be selected by
modifying X value in ATun = X. Press
Press
or
E NT E R
, a cursor is displayed on the parameter to be modified.
to select self-learning mode. Then press
77
E NT E R
to confirm. There are 7
Commissioning and Test Run
Parameters are modified in 【Parameter Setting】mode. The setting range of parameter refers to
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
self-learning modes. They are:
0: normal operation
1: static encoder self-learning
2: encoder modification
3: end of encoder self-learning
4: static motor self-learning
5: inverter optimised self-learning
6: static motor advanced learning
Chapter 5
7: dynamic encoder self-learning
Press
E SC
and return to previous menu.
5.3.5.3 【Fault Check】
1: Parameter Setting
Commissioning and Test Run
2: Motor Tuning
* 3: Fault Check
4: Parameter Processing
5: Modified Parameters
In 【Fault Check】 mode, records of voltage, current, speed reference, feedback speed and
content for latest 8 faults are displayed. In main interface, press
or
E NT E R
to display ER0=X, then press
and display changes from ER0 to ER7. ER0 is the latest fault, ER7 is the earliest
one. X stands for the fault code in current fault index. The explanation of this fault is displayed
underneath at the same time. Press on more time
E NT E R
in fault code display screen, current DC Bus
voltage (Ude), output current (Irms), speed reference (Vref) and feedback speed (V/Fbk) are displayed.
Press
E NT E R
again and return to fault code display screen. Press
E SC
and return to previous
menu.
5.3.5.4 【Parameter Processing】
1: Parameter Setting
2: Motor Tuning
3: Fault Check
* 4: Parameter Processing
5: Modified Parameters
In 【Parameter Processing】 mode, parameter can be uploaded, downloaded, initialized, cleared.
78
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
To select proper operation mode by modifying X value in Init = X.
Press
or
E NT E R
, a cursor is displayed on the parameter to be modified in position X. press
to select proper operation mode. Then press
E NT E R
to confirm. There are 4 parameter
processing modes. They are:
1: upload parameter to operator
2: download parameter to inverter
7: parameter reset
Press
E SC
Chapter 5
8: fault reset
and return to previous menu.
5.3.5.5 【Modified Parameters】
1: Parameter Setting
3: Fault Check
4: Parameter Processing
* 5: Modified Parameters
In【Modified Parameters】could Inquire and modify the recently modified parameters. Select the
parameter code in parameter set via
or
, then press
E NT E R
, a cursor indicating modified bit
will be shown on the parameter bit to be modified. After that, change the modified bit
or
with
, and plus or minus the value with
the modification, otherwise it will be invalid.
Press
E SC
to return to the previous menu.
79
or
. Finally press
E NT E R
to confirm
Commissioning and Test Run
2: Motor Tuning
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
5.4 Fast Commissioning for V/F Control
Start
panel given?
Continued
Y
panel speed
P40.00
set P40.02 and P40.03
N
terminal given?
N
N
Y
multi-speed frequency given?
Y
function of digital given
terminal X P30.00-P30.07
N
free stop?
open loop main and
auxiliary calculation
mode
P50.01
Set P12.00=1
Y
Set P12.00=0
Commissioning and Test Run
N
select the main and
auxiliary given mode
P51.01-P51.07
DC brake stop, set P12.00=2,
please correctly set P12.03-P12.05
select closed loop main
feedback mode of
P51.04
Y
set start hold frequency P011.01
and hold time for starting
frequency P11.02
N
Y
Select closed loop feedback
main and auxiliary
calculation
P51.05
Y
decelerate and stop?
auxiliary given mode of open
loop
P50.00
select closed loop given main and
auxiliary relationship calculation
P51.03
set P11.00=1
set DC brake
current P11.03 and
brake hold, hold
time P11.04
set stop hold frequency P12.01 and
hold time for stop frequency P12.02
Dynamic braking?
N
Y
set P13.00=1
N
Set P13.00=1
related function code
of process closed loop
P51 set
End
Cont.
5.5 Operation Example
In the following example, stop display parameter is the setting frequency, which is 50.00Hz at
factory. Those underlined are the current editing bit. Set the setting frequency, for example, P40.00 =
25.00Hz.
parameter
setting
ENT
P00.00
>>
ENT
P40.00
50.0 0
16
times
>>
1 time
5 0.00
∨
3 times
2 0.00
>>
parameter setting
ESC
P40.00
ENT
25.00
∨
Chapter 5
N
Set P11.00=0
rotating speed track starting,
set P11.00=2
correctly set multispeed frequency
P41.00~P41.15
auxiliary given mode of open
loop, select closed loop run
mode P51.00=1
main feedback for closed loop?
Y
DC brake firstly, then start
from starting frequency?
N
select analog channel
P10.03
closed loop process control?
Y
start from starting
frequency?
Communication given
P81.00-P81.04
5
times
1 time
20 .00
5.6 Fault Display
When inverter has fault, fault indicator D4 on top of operator will blink. LED tube light will
display real-time fault code. Table 5.5 lists fault codes and names.
80
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Table 5.5 Table of fault code & name
Fault
code
Fault
Fault description
code
Fault description
2
ADC fault
3
Heatsink overheat
4
Brake unit fault
5
Fuse break fault
6
Output torque overload
7
Speed deviation
8
DC bus over-voltage protection
9
DC bus under-voltage
10
Output phase loss
11
Motor overcurrent at low speed
12
Encoder fault
13
Current detected while stop
14
Speed reversed direction in running
15
Speed detected while stop
16
Wrong motor phase
17
Overspeed in the same direction
18
Overspeed in the opposite direction
19
Wrong phase sequence of UVW encoder
20
Encoder communication fault
21
abc overcurrent
22
Brake detection trouble
23
Input overvoltage
24
UVW encoder disconnected
25
Spare
26
27
Output overcurrent
28
SIN/COS encoder fault
29
Input phase loss
30
Overspeed protection
31
Motor high speed overcurrent
32
Ground protection
33
Aging capacitor
34
External fault
35
Output unbalance
36
Wrong parameter setting
37
Current sensor fault
38
Braking resistor short circuit
39
Too large instant current
40
Faulty output contactor
41
Brake detection fault
42
IGBT short fault
43
Communication fault
44
Abnormal input power
47
Abnormal analog input
48
Disconnected temperature sampling
49
PT detection fault
50
Humidity fault
51
Abnormal running output current
52
PTC high temperature alarm
81
Encoder haven’t
self-learned
Commissioning and Test Run
Module overcurrent protection
Chapter 5
1
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 6 Functional Parameter Table
6.1 Introduction to Function Code Parameters Table
Simple table field
Function code
symbol
Function code
name
Factory default
Setting range
Description
Function code symbol, for example P00.00
Name of function code, to explain its roles
Function code set value after reset to factory default operation (see P00.01)
The minimum and maximum value set permitted by function code
bps: baud rate; Hz, kHz: frequency; ms, s, min, h, kh: time; kW: power; /: no unit, etc
○: modifiable during running; ×: modifiable only during stop; *: read-only parameter,
Properties
unchangeable
Function code
User setting
List of function code parameter setting
Parameter record by the user
6.2 Simple Table of Function Code Parameters
6.2.1 Group P0X User Parameters
Group P00 Password Parameter
Function
Function
Factory
Setting
Code
Name
Default
range
0
P00.00
P00.01
P00.02
Login
password
Modify
password
Spare
password
Unit
Properties
0~65535
/
×
0
0~65535
/
×
0
0~65535
/
×
Option description
0: no password; other:
login password;
0: no password; other:
password protection;
Spare
Group P01 Customer parameter
6.2.2 Group P1X Control Parameters
6.2.2.1 Group P10 Basic Control Parameters
Function
Code
P10.00
Function Name
Control mode
Factory
Setting
Default
range
0
0~5
83
Unit
/
Prope
rties
×
Option description
0: voltage vector V/f control
Functional Parameter Table
option
Chapter 6
V: voltage; A: current; ℃: degree; Ω: ohm,; mH: millihenry rpm: rotating speed %: percentage;
Unit
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
Option description
rties
selection
1: Vector control 2 without
speed sensor
2: Torque control with speed
sensor
3: Vector control with speed
sensor
4: Spare
5: Vector control 1 without
speed sensor
P10.01
Operating mode
Chapter 6
selection
0
0~3
/
×
0: 2-wire 1; 1: 2-wire 2; 2:
3-wire 1; 3: 3-wire 2;
0: panel 1: terminal
P10.02
Run command
given mode
0
0~4
/
×
2: communication (Modbus)
3: CAN given
4: Profibus_DP given
0: given ▲ and ▼ for panel
Functional Parameter Table
frequency
1: digital multi-speed given
target speed
2: spare
3: analog 0 given target speed
4: analog 0 given current
speed
5: analog 1 given target speed
o
Frequency/speed
P10.03
given mode 1
6: analog 1 given current
0
0~16
/
×
speed
7: communication (Modbus)
given current speed
8: PID given target speed
9: spare
10: spare
11: spare
12: communication (Modbus)
given target speed
13: CAN given current speed
14: CAN given target speed
84
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
Option description
rties
15: Up/Down given speed
16: Profibus_DP given speed
0: internal parameter limit
1: analog 0 limit
P10.06
Speed limit
selection
0
0~4
/
×
2: analog 1 limit
3: analog 2 limit
4: ModBus communication
limit
Frequency/speed
given mode 2
0
0~16
/
×
As P10.03
6.2.2.2 Group P11 Starting Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
Starting mode
0
0~2
/
×
1: restart after DC braking
2: speed track start
P11.01
P11.02
P11.03
P11.04
Start holding
frequency
Holding time of
starting frequency
Starting DC
injection current
Starting DC
injection time
0.00
0.00~30.00
Hz
×
0.0
0.0~3600.0
s
×
30.0
0.0~120.0
%
×
5.0
0.0~99.9
s
×
P11.05
Excitation time
0.0
0.0~99.9
s
×
P11.06
Zero servo time
0.0
0.0~99.9
s
×
0.20
0.00~99.99
s
×
1000
0~65535
ms
×
100
0.0~65535
ms
×
/
×
/
×
P11.07
P11.08
P11.09
P11.10
P11.11
Brake actuation
time
Track delay time
Track zero voltage
time
Tracking voltage
Kp
Tracking voltage
Ki
0.20
0.30
0.00~
6553.50
0.00~
6553.50
85
Functional Parameter Table
0: normal start
P11.00
Chapter 6
P10.07
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
P11.12
P11.13
P11.14
Function Name
Tracking voltage
Kd
Track exit delay
Maximum current
during track
Factory
Setting
Default
range
0.00
0.00~
6553.50
Unit
Prope
rties
/
×
1000
0~65535
ms
×
100.0
0~200.0
%
×
10.0
0~100.0
%
×
0
0~65535
V
×
Hz
×
Option description
Tracking
P11.15
frequency change
gain
P11.16
Chapter 6
P11.17
P11.18
P11.19
Maximum voltage
during track
Initial tracking
frequency
Maximum current
during track
Reverse breaking
current
50.00
0.00~
100.00
0.0
0~6553.5
A
×
20.0
0.0~100.0
%
×
Functional Parameter Table
6.2.2.3 Group P12 Parking Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Properties
Option description
0: inertia parking
1: decelerate parking
2: deceleration + DC
P12.00
Parking mode
0
0~4
/
×
braking
3: deceleration + holding
excitation
4: deceleration+ holding
torque
P12.01
P12.02
P12.03
P12.04
P12.05
P12.06
Parking holding
frequency
Parking frequency
holding time
DCbraking initial
frequency
Parking DC braking
current
Parking DC braking
time
Parking excitation
0.00
0.00~
300.00
Hz
×
0.0
0.0~99.9
s
×
2.50
0.00~10.00
Hz
×
50.0
0.0~100.0
%
×
0.5
0~10.0
s
×
0
0~65535
s
×
86
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Properties
Option description
holding time
6.2.2.4 Group P13 Braking Function Parameters
Function
Code
P13.00
P13.01
Dynamic braking
selection
Braking turning-on
voltage
Braking unit
service time
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Proper
Option description
ties
0: turn on dynamic braking
1
0~1
/
×
1: not turn on dynamic braking
Built-in braking unit, default 0
660
620~750
V
×
60.0
0.0~300.0
s
×
Setting range
Unit
Properties
Chapter 6
P13.02
Function Name
6.2.2.5 Group P14 V/F Control Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Default
Option description
line;
1: 1.2-power curve
P14.00
V/F curve setting
0
0~4
/
×
2: 1.5-power curve
3: second power curve
4: user defined
P14.01
P14.02
P14.03
P14.04
P14.05
P14.06
P14.07
P14.08
P14.09
V/F voltage value
V0
V/F frequency value
F0
V/F voltage value
V1
V/F frequency value
F1
V/F voltage value
V2
V/F frequency value
F2
V/F voltage value
V3
V/F frequency value
F3
V/F voltage value
76
0.0~460.0
V
×
10.00
0.00~300.00
Hz
×
152
0.0~460.0
V
×
20.00
0.00~300.00
Hz
×
228
0.0~460.0
V
×
30.00
0.00~300.00
Hz
×
304
0.0~460.0
V
×
40.00
0.00~300.00
Hz
×
380
0.0~460.0
V
×
87
F0<F1
F1<F2
F2<F3
F3<F4
Functional Parameter Table
0: standard V/F straight
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Default
Setting range
Unit
Properties
Option description
0.00~300.00
Hz
×
F4≤P70.00
V4
P14.10
V/F frequency value
F4
50.00
6.2.3 Group P2X Motor Parameters
6.2.3.1 P20 Basic Motor Parameters
Function
Code
P20.00
Function Name
Type of motor 1
Chapter 6
Factory
Setting
Default
range
0
0~1
/
0~655.35
kW
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
A
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
Hz
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
Unit
Prope
Option description
rties
0:
asynchronous
1:
synchronous
As per
P20.01
Rated power of motor
the
1
inverter
power
As per
Functional Parameter Table
P20.02
Rated current of
the
0.1~
motor 1
inverter
999.9
current
P20.03
P20.04
P20.05
P20.06
P20.07
P20.08
P20.09
P20.10
P20.13
P20.14
Rated frequency of
motor 1
Rated speed of motor
1
Rated voltage of
motor 1
Number of poles of
motor 1
Rated slip frequency
of motor 1
Maximum slip
frequency of motor 1
Phase sequence of
motor 1
No-load current
coefficient of motor 1
Maximum power of
motor 1
Type of motor 2
50.00
0.00~
300.00
1460
0~30000
rpm
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
380
0~460
V
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
4
2~128
/
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
/
×
%
×
Hz
×
1.40
2.80
1
30.00
50.00
0
0.10~
655.35
0.10~
655.35
0~1
0.10~
60.00
0.00~
300.00
0~1
88
/
Number
of
pole-pair
of
motor=poles/2
Set as per the motor nameplate
0: negative phase sequence;
1: positive phase sequence
0: asynchronous
1: synchronous
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
As per
P20.15
Rated power of motor
the
2
inverter
0~655.35
kW
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
A
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
Hz
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
power
As per
P20.16
Rated current of
the
0.1~
motor 2
inverter
999.9
current
P20.17
P20.19
P20.20
P20.22
P20.23
P20.24
P20.26
Rated speed of motor
2
Rated voltage of
motor 2
Number of poles of
motor 2
Rated slip frequency
of motor 2
Maximum slip
frequency of motor 2
Phase sequence of
motor 2
No-load current
coefficient of motor 2
Maximum frequency
of motor 2
0.00~
300.00
1460
0~30000
rpm
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
380
0~460
V
×
Set as per the motor nameplate
4
2~128
/
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
/
×
%
×
Hz
×
1.40
2.80
1
30.00
50
0.10~
655.35
0.10~
655.35
0~1
0.00~
60.00
0.00~
300.00
Number of pole-pair of
motor=poles/2
Set as per the motor nameplate
0: negative phase sequence;
1: positive phase sequence
Note 1: different inverter power corresponds to different default value.
6.2.3.2
Function
Code
P21.01
P21.02
P21.03
P21 Advanced Motor Parameters
Function Name
Stator resistance of
motor 1
Rotor resistance of
motor 1
Stator inductance
of motor 1
Factory
Setting
Default
range
0.072
0.054
0.0221
0.000~
65.000
0.000~
65.000
0.0000~
6.0000
89
Unit
Prope
rties
Ω
×
Ω
×
H
×
Option description
Functional Parameter Table
P20.21
motor 2
50.00
Chapter 6
P20.18
Rated frequency of
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Rotor inductance
P21.04
P21.05
P21.06
P21.07
P21.08
Chapter 6
P21.09
P21.10
of motor 1
Mutual inductance
of motor 1
Stator resistance of
motor 2
Rotor resistance of
motor 2
Stator inductance
of motor 2
Rotor inductance
of motor 2
Mutual inductance
of motor 2
0.0221
0.0210
0.072
0.054
0.0221
0.0221
0.0210
0.0000~
6.0000
0.0000~
6.0000
0.000~
65.000
0.000~
65.000
0.0000~
6.0000
0.0000~
6.0000
0.0000~
6.0000
Prope
Unit
rties
H
×
H
×
Ω
×
Ω
×
H
×
H
×
H
×
Option description
6.2.3.3 P23 Motor Protection Parameters
Functional Parameter Table
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Default
Prop
Setting range
Unit
ertie
s
Motor overheat
P23.00
protection selection
Option description
0: no protection
0
0~2
/
×
1: input via analog A0
2: input via analog A1
Motor sensor
P23.01
protection threshold
5.000
value
P23.02
Motor overcurrent
protection time
0.000~
10.000
V
×
×
60.0
0.5~300.0
s
150.00
0.00~150.00
%
60.0
0.1~120.0
s
120.00
0.00~150.0
%
×
30.0
0.1~60.0
s
×
Motor low speed
P23.03
overcurrent
0.00~10.00V
×
20% rated speed and below
threshold value
P23.04
Motor low speed
overcurrent time
×
Motor high speed
P23.05
overcurrent
threshold value
P23.06
Motor high speed
overcurrent time
90
20% rated speed and above
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
6.2.4 Group P3X Digital Parameters
6.2.4.1 P30 Digital Input Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Propert
Default
range
7
0~63
/
×
8
0~63
/
×
0
0~63
/
×
0
0~63
/
×
Unit
Option description
ies
Input function
P30.00
selection of terminal
X0
Input function
P30.01
selection of terminal
X1
Input function
P30.02
selection of terminal
Input function
P30.03
X3
Refer to Chapter 7
Input function
“Parameter Details”.
selection of terminal
0
0~63
/
×
0
0~63
/
×
0
0~63
/
×
1
0~1
/
×
Functional Parameter Table
P30.04
selection of terminal
X4
Input function
P30.05
selection of terminal
X5
Input function
P30.06
selection of terminal
X6
Input function
P30.07
selection of terminals
P1-P2
Input filter times of
P30.08
Default high level, which
X0 ~ X6 and P1-P2
5
0~100
per
×
is reduced with over
temperature signal
6.2.4.2 P31 Digital Output Parameters
Function
Code
P31.00
P31.01
P31.02
P31.03
Function Name
Output K1 function
definition
Output K2 function
definition
Output K3 function
definition
Output K4 function
Factory
Propert
Setting range
Unit
2
0~63
/
×
25
0~63
/
×
“Definition table of
0
0~63
/
×
output terminals in
0
0~63
/
×
Default
91
Chapter 6
X2
ies
Option description
Refer to Chapter 7
multifunctional
group P31
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Propert
Setting range
Unit
0
0~63
/
×
0
0~63
/
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
0.0
0.0~60.0
s
×
4.0
0.0~50.0
%
×
1.00
0.0~300.00
Hz
×
1.00
0.00~300.00
Hz
×
0.20
0.00~300.00
Hz
×
2
0~65535
h
×
8
0~65535
h
×
Default
ies
Option description
definition
P31.04
P31.05
P31.06
P31.07
P31.08
Chapter 6
P31.09
P31.10
Functional Parameter Table
P31.11
P31.12
P31.13
P31.14
P31.15
P31.16
P31.17
P31.20
P31.21
P31.22
P31.23
P31.24
P31.25
Terminal Y0 output
function definition
Terminal Y1 output
function definition
Relay K1 terminal
action relay
Relay K1 terminal reset
relay
Relay K2 terminal
action relay
Relay K2 terminal reset
relay
Relay K3 terminal
action relay
Relay K3 terminal reset
relay
Relay K4 terminal
action relay
Relay K4 terminal reset
relay
Terminal Y0 action
delay
Terminal Y0 reset delay
Terminal Y1 action
delay
Terminal Y1 reset delay
Non zero current
detection width
Frequency arrive
detection width
Detection frequency
Detection frequency
width
Single run time arrive
Accumulated run time
arrive
92
For frequency
detection function
For frequency
detection function
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
6.2.4.3 P32 Analog Input Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Default
Setting range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
0: 0V ~ 10V
1: -10V ~ 10V
P32.00
A0 input type
1
0~3
/
×
2: 0 ~ 20mA
3: 4 ~ 20mA
Note: it depends on I/O
board type.
0: no function
1: target speed signal
2: current speed signal
A0 input function
selection
0
0~6
/
×
3: torque signal
4: compensating torque
signal
5: speed limit signal
6: PTC temperature signal
Chapter 6
P32.01
Voltage type:
A0 offset
10.000
0.000~20.000
V
×
0.000 offset-10.000V
10.000 offset 0V
20.000 offset +10V
P32.03
A0 gain
100.0
0.1~1000.0
%
×
Factor of proportionality,
typical 100%
When PTC temperature
P32.04
A0 filtering time
10
0~65535
ms
×
signal is chosen, default
2000ms
P32.05
A0 amplitude
limit
It is set as 20.000mA, if
10.000
0.000~10.000
V/mA
×
current type input is
chosen.
0: 0V ~ 10V
1: -10V ~ 10V
P32.06
A1 input type
1
0~3
/
×
2: 0 ~ 20mA
3: 4 ~ 20mA
Note: it depends on IO
board type.
P32.07
A1 input function
selection
0
0~6
/
×
P32.08
A1 offset
10.000
0.000~20.000
V
×
P32.09
A1 gain
100.0
0.1~1000.0
%
×
As A0
When PTC temperature
P32.10
A1 filtering time
10
0~65535
ms
×
signal is chosen, default
2000ms.
93
Functional Parameter Table
P32.02
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
P32.11
Function Name
A1 amplitude
limit
Factory
Default
Setting range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
It is set as 20.000mA, if
10.000
0.000~10.000
V/mA
×
current type input is
chosen.
6.2.4.4 P33 Analog Output Parameters
Function
Code
P33.00
Function Name
M0 output
function selection
Factory
Proper
Setting range
Unit
1
0~16
/
×
Default
ties
Chapter 6
P33.01
M0 offset
15.000
0.000~20.000
V
×
P33.02
M0 gain
100.0
0.1~6000.0
%
×
2
0~16
/
×
P33.03
M1 output
function selection
Functional Parameter Table
P33.04
M1 offset
15.000
0.000~20.000
V
×
P33.05
M1 gain
100.0
0.1~6000.0
%
×
Option description
Refer to chapter 7
“Parameter details
Refer to chapter 7
“Parameter details
1:0~10V
P33.06
M0 output type
0
0~4
/
×
2:-10V~+10V
3:0~20mA
4:4~20mA
1:0~10V
P33.07
M1 output type
0
0~4
/
×
2:-10V~+10V
3:0~20mA
4:4~20mA
6.2.5 Group P4X Speed Control Parameters
6.2.5.1 P40 Basic Speed Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Default
Setting range
Unit
Proper
ties
P40.00
Panel speed
5.00
0.0~300.00
Hz
×
P40.01
Basic frequency
50.00
0.0~300.00
Hz
×
5.00
0.1~360.00
s
×
P40.02
P40.03
Acceleration time
0
Deceleration time
0
Option description
The greater power, the
longer default
acceleration time
5.00
0.1~360.00
94
s
×
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function
Code
P40.04
P40.05
P40.06
P40.07
P40.08
P40.10
P40.11
P40.13
1
Deceleration time
1
Acceleration time
2
Deceleration time
2
Acceleration time
3
Deceleration time
3
Acceleration
circular arc Ts0
Acceleration
circular arc Ts1
Deceleration
circular arc Ts2
Deceleration
circular arc Ts3
Proper
Setting range
Unit
5.00
0.1~360.00
s
×
5.00
0.1~360.00
s
×
5.00
0.1~360.00
s
×
5.00
0.1~360.00
s
×
5.00
0.1~360.00
s
×
5.00
0.1~360.00
s
×
0.00
0.00~10.00
s
×
Start to accelerate
0.00
0.00~10.00
s
×
Stop accelerating
0.00
0.00~10.00
s
×
Start to decelerate
0.00
0.00~10.00
s
×
Stop decelerating
Default
ties
Option description
6.2.5.2 P41 Digital Multi-speed Parameters
Function
Code
P41.00
P41.01
P41.02
P41.03
P41.04
P41.05
P41.06
P41.07
Function Name
Digital multi-speed
given 0
Digital multi-speed
given 1
Digital multi-speed
given 2
Digital multi-speed
given 3
Digital multi-speed
given 4
Digital multi-speed
given 5
Digital multi-speed
given 6
Digital multi-speed
given 7
Factory
Setting
Default
range
0.00
5.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
95
Unit
Prope
rties
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Option description
Functional Parameter Table
P40.12
Acceleration time
Factory
Chapter 6
P40.09
Function Name
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
P41.08
P41.09
P41.10
P41.11
P41.12
Chapter 6
P41.13
P41.14
P41.15
Functional Parameter Table
P41.16
Function Name
Digital multi-speed
given 8
Digital multi-speed
given 9
Digital multi-speed
given 10
Digital multi-speed
given 11
Digital multi-speed
given 12
Digital multi-speed
given 13
Digital multi-speed
given 14
Digital multi-speed
given 15
Inching frequency
given
Factory
Setting
Default
range
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.00
Unit
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~50.00
Prope
Option description
rties
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
6.2.6 Group P5X Process Control Parameters
6.2.6.1 Group P50 Process Open Loop Parameters
Function
Code
P50.00
Function Name
Open loop auxiliary
given mode
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
0: no; 1: A0; 2: A1;
0
0~5
/
×
3: spare 4: spare
5: PID given target speed
0: no calculation
1: main+auxiliary
Open loop given main
P50.01
and auxiliary
relationship
2: main-auxiliary
0
0~6
/
×
3: spare
4: spare
calculation
5: take the maximum value
6: take the minimum value
6.2.6.2 P51 Process Closed Loop Parameters
Function
Code
P51.00
Function Name
Closed loop control
selection
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
0: invalid closed loop run
0
0~1
/
×
control
1: effective closed loop run
96
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
Option description
rties
control
0: internal given
1: A0 2: A1
P51.01
Closed loop control
main given mode
0
0~6
/
×
3: spare 4: spare
5: spare
6: Modbus communication
given
0: no
1: A0
auxiliary given mode
2: A1 3: spare
2
0~6
/
×
4: spare
5: spare
6: Modbus communication
given
Chapter 6
P51.02
Closed loop control
0: no calculatiojn
Closed loop control
P51.03
auxiliary given
2: main-auxiliary
0
0~6
/
×
calculation
3: spare
4: spare
5: take the maximum value
6: take the minimum value
0: no
1: A0
2: A1
P51.04
Closed loop control
main feedback mode
1
0~6
/
×
3: spare
4: spare
5: multi-voltage given
6: Modbus communication
given
0: no
1: A0
2: A1
P51.05
Closed loop control
auxiliary feedback mode
2
0~6
/
×
3: spare
4: spare
5: spare
6: Modbus communication
given
0: no calculation
Closed loop control
P51.06
feedback main and
0
0~6
auxiliary calculation
/
×
1: main+auxiliary
2: main-auxiliary
3: spare
97
Functional Parameter Table
1: main+auxiliary
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
4: spare
5: take the maximum value
6: take the minimum value
Chapter 6
P51.07
PID internal given value
0.70
P51.08
Unit
0
P51.09
Proportional gain Kp
0.50
P51.10
Integral gain Ki
0.50
P51.11
Differential gain Kd
0.00
P51.12
Spare
0
0.00~
○
10.00
0~3
0.00~
10.00
0.00~
10.00
0.00~
10.00
×
/
×
/
○
/
○
/
○
×
×
The unit depends on P51.08
Unit 0: V 1: % 2: Mpa 3:
degree
0: Stop integral regulation
Functional Parameter Table
when the frequency reaches the
P51.13
Integral mode selection
0
0~1
/
×
upper and lower limit
1: Continue integral regulation
when the frequency reaches the
upper and lower limit
P51.14
Spare
0
×
×
×
P51.15
Spare
0
×
×
×
P51.16
Spare
0
×
×
×
P51.17
Spare
0
×
×
×
P51.18
Spare
0
×
×
×
P51.19
Spare
0
×
×
×
P51.20
Spare
0
×
×
×
P51.21
Spare
0
×
×
×
100.00
0.00~
%
×
0
×
×
×
50.0
0.00~
%
×
%
×
%
×
P51.22
P51.23
P51.24
P51.25
P51.26
Integral action upper
limit
Spare
Closed loop input upper
limit
closed loop input lower
limit
Closed loop output
upper limit
0.0
100.0
0.0~
20.0
0.00~
98
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
Option description
rties
P51.27
Spare
0
×
×
×
P51.28
Dormancy selection
0
0~ 1
/
×
P51.29
Dormancy frequency
30.00
Hz
×
P51.30
Dormancy delay
10.0
S
×
P51.31
Awake deviation
0.10
%
×
P51.32
Awake delay
10.0
s
×
P51.33
Given acceleration time
0.0
s
×
S
×
V
×
The unit depends on P51.08
V
×
The unit depends on P51.08
V
×
The unit depends on P51.08
V
×
The unit depends on P51.08
Hz
×
P51.36
P51.37
P51.38
filtering time
Given quantity lower
limit
Feedback quantity range
lower limit
Given quantity upper
limit
Feedback quantity range
upper limit
0.01
0.00
0.00
10.00
10.00
0~
655.35
0.0~
100.0
0.0~
3600.0
0.0~
50.0
0.00~
50.000
0.00~
100.00
0.00~
100.00
0.00~
100.00
0.00~
100.00
P51.28=1 valid
P51.28=1 valid
P51.2=1 valid,
0.0~
P51.39
Preset frequency
22.0
Max.Fre
quency
P51.40
P51.41
Preset frequency
holding time
Positive and negative
characteristics
0
0~60
s
×
0
0~1
/
×
0: positive characteristic
1: negative characteristic
6.2.7 Group P6X High-Performance Control Parameters
6.2.7.1 Group P60 Speed Loop Control Parameters
Function
Code
P60.03
P60.04
P60.05
Function Name
Speed loop - low
speed P
Speed loop - low
speed I
Speed loop - low
Factory
Setting
Default
range
100.00
5.00
0.50
0.00~
655.35
0.00~
655.35
0.00~
99
Unit
Prope
rties
/
×
/
×
/
×
Option description
Low speed section
Functional Parameter Table
P51.35
Closed loop output
50.00
1:Y
Chapter 6
P51.34
0.00~
0:N
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
speed D
P60.06
P60.07
P60.08
P60.09
P60.10
Chapter 6
P60.11
P60.12
Functional Parameter Table
P60.13
P60.14
Speed loop medium speed P
Speed loop medium speed I
Speed loop medium speed D
Speed loop - high
speed P
Speed loop - high
speed I
Speed loop - high
speed D
Switching frequency
0
Switching frequency
1
V/FVC 速度滤波时
间
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
655.35
70.00
2.00
0.20
70.00
2.00
0.10
10.0
60.0
15
0.00~
655.35
0.00~
655.35
0.00~
655.35
0.00~
655.35
0.00~
655.35
0.00~
655.35
0.00~
655.35
0.00~
655.35
0~65535
/
×
/
×
/
×
/
×
/
×
/
×
%
×
%
×
ms
×
Medium speed section
High speed section
6.2.7.2 Group P61 Current Control Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
P61.00
Current loop Kp
1.40
P61.01
Current loop Ki
1.00
P61.02
Current loop Kd
0.00
P61.03
P61.04
P61.05
P61.06
P61.07
Current loop
bandwidth
Magnetic link
bandwidth
Current loop selection
V/F control current
loop Max
V/F control current
loop Min
400.0
0.8
0
1.0
1.0
0.01~
9.99
0.01~
9.99
0.00~
9.99
0.1~
1000.0
0.01~
1000.0
0~10
0.0
~100.0
0.0
~100.0
100
Unit
Prope
rties
/
×
/
×
/
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
/
×
%
×
%
×
Option description
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
6.2.8 Group P7X Enhanced Control Parameters
6.2.8.1 P70 Limit and Protection Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
0.01~
P70.00
Frequency upper limit
50.00
Max.Freq
Hz
×
0.01~maximum frequency
Hz
×
0.01~frequency upper limit
Hz
×
0.01~300.00
uency
0.01~
P70.01
Frequency lower limit
0.00
Freq.
upper
limit
Maximum output
frequency
55.00
0.01~
300.00
P70.03
Spare
0
×
×
×
P70.04
Output torque limit
150
0~200
%
×
160
0~200
%
×
750
0~800
V
×
120.00
0.00~
%
×
/
×
/
×
V
×
Chapter 6
P70.02
Inverter acceleration
overcurrent threshold
Functional Parameter Table
P70.05
value
Inverter deceleration
P70.06
overvoltage threshold
value
P70.07
P70.08
P70.10
P70.11
P70.12
P70.13
P70.14
P70.15
P70.16
P70.17
Overspeed protection
coefficient
Special function
selection
PT signal channel
PT protection upper
threshold value
PT protection lower
threshold value
PT protection action
delay
HT signal channel
HT protection upper
threshold value
HT protection lower
threshold value
HT protection action
delay
16
0
0.000
3.0
0
10.000
0.000
3.0
380
0~
65535
0~2
0.000~
10.000
0.0~
s
10.0
0~2
0.000~
10.000
0.000~
10.000
0.0~
×
V
×
V
×
10.0
0~540
101
V
2:A1
0: NC 1:A0
2:A1
×
/
s
0: NC 1:A0
×
×
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
P70.18
P70.21
Function Name
Bus undervoltage
threshold value
PWM detection delay
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
0
0~400
%
×
800
0~5000
ms
×
Option description
0: run at the lower limit
P70.22
Below low limit
frequency selection
frequency
0
0~3
×
1: stop
2: given frequency 0
3: inertia stop
6.2.8.2 P71 Control Optimization Parameters
Chapter 6
Function
Code
P71.00
P71.01
Functional Parameter Table
P71.02
P71.03
P71.04
P71.05
P71.06
Function Name
Frequency hopping
speed 1
Frequency hopping
speed 2
Frequency hopping
speed 3
Frequency hopping
width
Inertia compensation
factor
No reverse
Interval time for
forward and reverse
Factory
Setting
Default
range
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
0.0
0.00~
100.00
0.00~
100.00
0.00~
100.00
0.00~
100.00
0.00~
100.00
0~1
0.0~
6553.5
Unit
Prope
rties
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
Hz
×
%
×
/
×
s
×
Option description
0:N
1:Y
0: 5-section;
P71.07
PWM modulation
mode
2
0~2
/
×
1: 7-section;
2: <40%rpm 7-section, >40%
5-section
0: none
1: automatic torque lifting
2: suppression oscillation
4: slip compensation
P71.08
Automatic torque
lifting
83
0~1000
/
×
8: stator resistance
compensation
16: dead-time compensation
32: bus voltage compensation
64: suppression oscillation 2
(bit selection function)
102
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function
Code
P71.09
P71.10
Function Name
V/F torque
compensation
V/F compensating
maximum frequency
Factory
Setting
Default
range
0.0
10.0
0.0~
30.0
0.0~
50.0
Unit
Prope
rties
%
×
Hz
×
Option description
Manual torque lifting,
P71.08=0
0: compensate 100% as per
P71.11
Dead-time
compensation mode
angle;
0
0~2
/
×
1: compensate 50% as per
angle;
2: compensation as per current
P71.14
Random PWM
width
6.000
0.000
P71.16
Regulator mode
1
P71.21
Output shutoff delay
0.3
P71.23
P71.24
Zero speed threshold
value
Forward dead-time
compensation
Reverse dead-time
compensation
0.20
8.000
0.000~
1.000
0~3
0.0~
10.0
0.00~
10.00
KHz
×
KHz
×
/
×
s
×
Hz
×
100
0~100
%
×
100
0~100
%
×
0: underflow updating 1:
P71.29
PWM modulation
selection
0
0~1
/
×
overflow/underflow updating
Set as 1 for the switching
frequency below 4kHz
P71.33
Speed precision
adjustment
100.0
0.0~
100.0
%
×
/
×
%
×
%
×
V
×
V
×
/
×
Performance
P71.34
improving
106
0~1000
compensation
P71.35
P71.36
System inertia factor
Automatic low speed
torque lifting
100.0
100.0
Power failure
P71.39
detection threshold
480
value
P71.40
P71.41
KEB bus target
voltage
Power failure
500
0
0.0~
300.0
0.0~
300.0
380~
550
380~
550
0~4
103
0: no handling
Functional Parameter Table
P71.22
1.100~
Chapter 6
P71.15
Carrier frequency
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
handling mode
Option description
1: track start (time limit)
2: track start (time unlimited)
3: KEB (with detection
undervoltage)
4: KEB (no detection
undervoltage)
P71.42
P71.43
Maximum outage
compensation time
KEB shortest action
time
3.0
100
KEB initial
Chapter 6
P71.44
frequency reduction
2.00
quantity
0.0~
60.0
0~2000
0.00~
5.00
s
×
ms
×
~
×
0.00
P71.45
KEB deceleration
time
10.00
0.00~
200.00
s
~
300.0
Functional Parameter Table
0
0: variable deceleration
P71.46
KEB deceleration
mode
1: automatic deceleration
0
0~3
/
×
2: constant deceleration
3: constant deceleration
(antistall)
P71.47
P71.48
KEB acceleration
time
KEB proportional
Kp
25.00
200.00
P71.49
KEB integral Ki
0.00
P71.50
KEB differential Kd
0.00
P71.51
P71.52
P71.53
P71.54
P71.55
P71.56
KEB integral upper
limit
KEB integral lower
limit
KEB closed loop
output upper limit
KEB closed loop
output lower limit
KEB voltage
deviation upper limit
KEB voltage zero
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
300.00
0.0
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.00~
300.00
0.0~
300.00
0.0~
300.00
0.0~
300.00
0.0~
300.00
0.0~
500.0
0.0~
104
s
×
/
×
/
×
/
×
%
×
%
×
%
×
%
×
V
×
V
×
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
deviation value
frequency threshold
0.00
value
P71.58
P71.62
Prope
rties
Option description
10.0
Variable carrier
P71.57
Unit
Fan control selection
0
UP/DOWN single
0.1
step length
0.00~
50.00
0~4
0.0~
10.0
Hz
×
/
×
Hz
×
6.2.9 Group P8X Communication Parameters
6.2.9.1 Group P80 Communication Selection Parameters
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
0:No communication
P80.00
Communication
mode selection
0
0~3
\
×
1:Profibus_DP;
2:Modbus;
6.2.9.2 Group P81 Modbus Communication Parameters
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
0:1200 bps
1:2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
P81.00
Communication
baud rate
3
0~7
bps
×
3: 9600 bps
4:19200 bps
5:38400 bps
6:57600 bps
7:76800 bps
0:1−8−1, None
P81.01
Data format
0
0~2
/
×
1:1−8−1, ODD
2:1−8−1, EVEN
P81.02
P81.04
P81.05
P81.06
Transmission
mode selection
Local address
Communication
status word set 1
Communication
status word set 2
1
0~1
/
×
0:ASC;1:RTU
1
1~247
/
×
1~247,0 is broadcast address
0
/
×
0
/
×
105
Functional Parameter Table
3:CANbus
Function
Chapter 6
Function
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Communication
P81.07
address format
0: hexadecimal number
1
/
×
selection
system;
1: decimal number system
6.2.9.3 Group P82 Profibus_DP Communication Parameters
Function
Code
P82.00
P82.01
P82.02
Chapter 6
P82.03
P82.04
P82.05
Function Name
Local address
Big endian and
little endian mode
User-defined status
word set 1
User-defined status
word set 2
User-defined status
word set 3
User-defined status
word set 4
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
0
0~255
/
×
0
0~1
/
×
16
×
13
/
×
10
/
×
18
/
×
Option description
0~255
See communication appendix
B
See communication appendix
B
See communication appendix
B
See communication appendix
B
See communication appendix
B
Functional Parameter Table
6.2.10 Group P9X Fault and Display Parameters
6.2.10.1 Group P90 Language Selection Parameters
Function
Code
P90.00
Function Name
Manipulator
language selection
Factory
Setting
Default
range
0
0~1
Unit
/
Prope
rties
×
Option description
0:Chinese
1:English
6.2.10.2 Group P91 LCD Display Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
P91.00
U01 display data
20
0~34
/
×
P91.01
U02 display data
2
0~34
/
×
P91.02
U03 display data
3
0~34
/
×
P91.03
U04 display data
4
0~34
/
×
P91.04
U05 display data
6
0~34
/
×
P91.05
U06 display data
16
0~34
/
×
P91.06
U07 display data
7
0~34
/
×
P91.07
U08 display data
5
0~34
/
×
0
0~65535
/
×
P91.08
U01 - U08
monitoring selection
106
Option description
Refer to Chapter 7
Refer to Chapter 7
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
6.2.10.3 Group P92 LED Display Parameters
Function
Code
P92.00
Function Name
LED display data
Factory
Setting
Default
range
2
0~34
Unit
/
Prope
Option description
rties
×
Refer to Chapter 7
6.2.10.4 Group P93 Running Record Parameters
Function
Code
P93.00
P93.01
P93.03
P93.04
electrification time
Inverter accumulated
running time
Radiator maximum
temperature record
Accumulated output
power
Inverter output
power
Fan running time
Setting
Default
range
0
0~65535
h
*
0
0~65535
h
*
0.0
0.0~100.0
degree
*
0.0
0.0~999.9
kWh
*
0
0~65535
MWh
*
0
0~65535
h
*
Unit
Prope
Option description
rties
6.2.10.5 Group P94 Troubleshooting Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
Option description
rties
0: no fault relay output for
minor fault
1: fault relay output for minor
P94.00
Inverter minor fault
processing mode
fault
1
0~3
/
*
2: fault relay output and
shutdown for 52#PTC fault,
and no automatic reset for the
fault
3: 1 and 2 are valid.
P94.01
P94.02
P94.03
P94.04
P94.05
Inverter fault
automatic reset time
Inverter fault
automatic reset times
Radiator overheating
time
Overspeed
protection time
Input default phase
voltage threshold
10.0
0.0~180.0
s
*
0
0~100
/
*
0.5
0.0~180.0
s
×
1.0
0.0~180.0
s
×
65
0~150
V
×
107
Inverter fault automatic reset
time
Inverter fault automatic reset
times
Functional Parameter Table
P93.05
Inverter accumulated
Factory
Chapter 6
P93.02
Function Name
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function
Code
P94.06
P94.08
P94.09
P94.12
P94.13
Chapter 6
P94.14
P94.15
Function Name
Braking resistor
short times
Output default phase
confirm time
Relay fault confirm
voltage
IGBT protection
times
I2t protection
selection
Analog A0
disconnection value
Analog A1
disconnection value
Factory
Setting
Default
range
10
0~100
2.000
0.000~
180.000
Unit
Prope
rties
per
×
s
×
90
0~350
V
×
2
0~1000
/
×
0
0~3
/
×
0.0
0.0~100
%
×
0.0
0.0~100
%
×
Option description
0: no treatment
1: protection shutdown
Functional Parameter Table
2: run at the current speed
P94.16
Abnormal analog
treatment
3: run at the maximum
0
0~5
/
×
amplitude limit
4: run at the minmum
amplitude limit
5: run at the set value for
multi-speed 15
Temperature
P94.17
sampling
disconnection
0
0~1
/
×
1
0~1
/
×
s
×
/
×
0: no treatment
1: protection shutdown
treatment
P94.18
Communication
protection
Communication
P94.19
disconnection
2.000
protection time
P94.20
Grounding
protection times
100
0.000~
65.535
1~60000
0: no treatment
1: protection shutdown
6.2.10.6 Group P95 Product Identification Parameters
Function
Code
P95.00
P95.01
Function Name
Inverter hardware
version
Inverter software
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Unit
Prope
rties
Option description
450.04
/
*
Inverter hardware version
Factory
/
*
Inverter software version
108
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function
Code
Function Name
Factory
Setting
Default
range
Prope
Unit
Option description
rties
version
P95.02
P95.03
Version number
Profibus_DP
Software version
100.01
/
Factory
*
Version number
*
Profibus_DP software version
6.2.10.6 Group P96 Inverter Product Parameters
Function
Code
Function Name
Inverter rated power
P96.01
Inverter rated current
P96.02
P96.03
P96.05
P96.06
P96.07
P96.08
Default
range
Automatic
identificatio
n
current
Inverter rated
voltage
380
Inverter power factor
current
Automatic
Inverter module
identificatio
rated current
n
Built-in braking unit
current
balance coefficient
Properties
0.0~999.9
kW
×
0.0~999.9
A
×
0.0~999.9
A
×
0~460
V
×
0~99
Inverter sensor
3-phase current
Unit
1.000
Option description
0~480
*
0~9999
A
*
0~9999
0~9999
A
*
0~9999
0~9999
A
*
0~9999
*
0.0~0.99
0.000~
99.999
109
Functional Parameter Table
P96.04
Inverter maximum
Setting
Chapter 6
P96.00
Factory
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
6.3 User Parameters Record Sheet
Function
code
Set value
Function
Set value
code
Function
code
Chapter 6
Functional Parameter Table
110
Set value
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 7 Parameter Details
7.1 Introduction to the Main Menu
7.1.1 Parameter Setting
Parameters in groups P0X-P9X will be displayed after it enters. When the login password is
correct, the modifiable parameters can be modified. Refer to the following for their specific meanings.
Simple table field
Description
Function code symbol
Function code symbol, for example P00.00
Name of function code
Name of function code, to explain its roles
Function code option
Setting range
List of function code parameter setting
The minimum and maximum value set permitted by function code
Unit
percentage; bps: baud rate; Hz, kHz: frequency; ms, s, min, h, kh: time; kW: power; /: no
unit, etc
Factory default
Function code set value after reset to factory default operation (see P00.04)
Chapter 7
V: voltage; A: current; ℃: degree; Ω: ohm; mH: millihenry rpm: rotating speed %:
○: modifiable during running; ×: modifiable only during stop; *: read-only parameter,
Properties
unchangeable
Parameter record by the user
7.1.2 Motor Tuning
This option is motor self-learning. For the different motor firstly connecting to inverter, it is
better to have a self-learning.
If the motor nameplate and other parameters are known, please directly write them into the
related parameters; if the motor internal parameters are unknown, please execute parameter
self-tuning. Press ENTER to determine and select the self-learning scheme.
0: normal running mode
4: motor static self-learning
7.1.3 Fault Check
Press ENT to enter list of fault, 8 faults will be displayed in reverse time order. If some fault is
found, press ENT to display the bus voltage, output current and running frequency etc when it occurs.
52 fault codes totally, whose corresponding fault type is shown in the following table.
Fault No.
Fault display
Fault No.
Fault display
1
Module overcurrent protection
2
ADC fault
3
Radiator overheating
4
Braking unit fault
5
Fuse blown fault
6
Output over-torque
111
Parameter Details
User setting
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 7
Parameter Details
Fault No.
Fault display
Fault No.
Fault display
7
Speed variation
8
Bus overvoltage protection
9
Bus undervoltage
10
Output default phase
11
Motor low speed overcurrent
12
/
13
Current detected during parking
14
Reverse speed during running
15
/
16
/
17
Forward overspeed
18
Reverse overspeed
21
abc overcurrent
22
Brake detection fault
23
Input overvoltage
24
/
27
Output overcurrent
28
/
29
Input default phase
30
Overspeed protection
31
Motor high speed overcurrent
32
Grounding protection
33
Capacitor aging
34
External fault
35
Output unbalance
36
/
37
Current sensor fault
38
Braking resistor short circuit
39
Too large instantaneous current value
40
Output contactor fault
41
Brake switch detection fault
42
IGBT short circuit fault
43
Communication fault
44
Abnormal input power
45
I2t instantaneous value overcurrent
46
I2t effective value overcurrent
47
Abnormal analog input
48
High temperature sampling disconnection
49
PT detection fault
50
Humidity fault
51
Abnormal running output current
52
PTC over-temperature warning
7.1.4 Parameter Processing
Press ENTER to enter. The function is used for change permission and initialization level of
setting parameters.
0: Spare
1: Parameters upload to the operator
2: Parameters downloaded to inverter
3: Spare
4: Spare
5: Spare
6: Spare
7: Parameters Reset
8: Fault Reset
Note: Press ESC to return to the main menu interface.
112
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
7.2 Classification and Format of Parameter Groups
7.2.1 Format of Parameter Groups
P
Function
code zone
A
B
group No. in
the zone
.
C
separator
D
index in the
group
7.2.2 Zoning of Parameter Groups
Description of function code
P0X user parameters
Group P00
Password parameter group
Group P10
Basic control parameter group
Group P11
Start parameter group
Group P12
Parking parameter group
Group P13
Braking function parameter
Group P14
V/F parameter group
Group P20
Basic motor parameter group
Group P21
Advanced motor parameter group
Group P22
Motor auxiliary parameter group
Group P23
Motor protection parameter group
Group P30
Digital input parameter group
Group P31
Digital output parameter group
Group P32
Analog input parameter group
Group P33
Analog output parameter group
Group P40
Basic speed parameter group
Group P41
Digital multi-speed parameter group
Group P50
Process open loop parameter group
Group P51
Process closed loop parameter group
P6X High-Performance control
Group P60
Speed loop control parameter group
parameters
Group P61
Current loop control parameter group
Group P70
Limit and protection parameter group
Group P71
Control optimization parameter group
Group P80
Communication control selection group
Group P81
Modbus communication group
Group P82
Profibus DP communication group
Group P90
Language selection group
Group P91
LCD display group
Group P92
LED display group
Group P93
Running record parameter group
P1X control parameters
P2X motor parameters
P3X terminal control parameters
P4X speed parameters
P5X process control parameters
P7X enhanced control parameters
P8X communication parameters
P9X display parameters
113
Parameter Details
Group No. in the zone
Chapter 7
Function code zone
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Group P94
Troubleshooting parameter group
Group P95
Inverter product identification parameter group
Group P96
Inverter product parameter
7.3 Group P0X User Parameter Groups
7.3.1 Group P00 Basic Function Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P00.00
Login password
0~65535
0
This function is to prevent the irrelevant personnel from inquiring or modifying parameters, so as
to protect safety of the inverter parameters.
00000: No password protection. All parameters may be inquired, no password provided for the
inverter at factory.
Chapter 7
Once the user password set becomes valid, when it enters parameter setting status again, all
parameters can’t be modified via operation panel unless the correct password is input, which can be
viewed only. Parameter password is always shown as 00000.
Note: factory setting of AS180 series inverter isn’t provided with user password (P00.00=0),
Parameter Details
therefore no password is provided for your first login.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P00.01
Modify password
0~65535
0
Set a password:
Input a 5-digit number as user password, then press ENTER to confirm it, and reset it once.
Change password:
Press ENTER to enter password authentification status, 00000 is displayed. Then enter parameter
editing status after the correct password is input, select P00.01 (P00.00 parameter is displayed as
00000), input the new password and press ENTER to confirm it. Then reset the same password as
P00.01 once again, indicating successfully setting the new password if “successful password setting”
is shown.
Cancel password:
Press ENTER to enter password authentification status, 00000 is displayed, and then input the
correct user password to enter parameter editing status. View P00.01 to be 00000, press ENTER to
confirm, reset P00.01=00000, then the password is cancelled after “password clear” is shown.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P00.02
Spare password
0~65535
0
When the setting password is forgotten, users can input the spare password to modify parameter
114
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
value, including new password.
7.3.2 Group P01~09 User Function Parameter
7.4 Group P1X Control Parameter Groups
7.4.1 Group P10 Basic Control Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P10.00
Control mode selection
0~5
0
The function is to set the control running mode of inverter. Of which, 0 is V/f control, 1, 3 and 5
mean vector speed control; 2 is vector torque control; 4 is spare.
0: Voltage vector V/f control: it applies to most applications, regulating frequency proportional
to voltage, keep control speed under flux, without encoder.
the good control effect.
1: Vector control 2 without speed sensor: it applies to the general variable speed drive
applications with high speed control precision and greater torque requirement.
Chapter 7
Please reasonably set V/F control parameters in group P14 when selecting V/F control, to reach
When selecting vector control, motor parameter self-tuning will be executed firstly, to correctly
starting motor parameter self-tuning. At the same time, vector control parameters in group P6X will be
set reasonably, to realize its best control effect.
2: Vector control with speed sensor: it is similar to 3, it is provided with speed encoder, with
higher control precision and better speed protection.
3: Vector control with speed sensor: Pulse encoder is required, which is able to realize speed
with higher precision than vector control 2 without encoder speed feedback and torque performance
4: Spare.
5: Vector control 1 without speed sensor: Pulse encoder isn’t required, which is able to realize
speed with higher precision than open loop V/F and torque performance. Performance index is less
than vector control 2 without speed sensor, but not sensitive to motor parameters. It applies to the
applications where motor parameters can’t easily be obtained.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P10.01
Rotation mode selection
0~3
0
P10.01 is used to set a mode to control inverter start and stop by use of terminals X0 (forward)
and X1 (reverse) under terminal running command given mode.
0: 2-wire 1;
115
Parameter Details
set the motor nameplate parameter as P20.xx~P20.xx and obtain the accurate motor parameters by
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
K2 K1
Running
运行命令
command
24V
0
0
Stop
停止
1
0
反转
Reverse
K1
0
1
Forward
正转
K2
1
Stop
停止
1
Inverter
变频器
XV
X0(P30.00=7)
X1(P30.01=8)
XC
Figure 7-1 2-wire running mode 1
1: 2-wire 2;
K2 K1
Running
运行命令
command
24V
Chapter 7
0
0
停止
Stop
1
0
Stop
停止
K1
0
1
Forward
正转
K2
1
1
Reverse
反转
Inverter
变频器
XV
X0(P30.00=7)
X1(P30.01=8)
XC
Figure 7-2 2-wire running mode 2
2: 3-wire 1;
Parameter Details
Terminal Xi (i=2 ~ 7) sets the function “9: 3-wire running control”.
When K3 closes, K0 (forward) and K1 (reverse) control are effective; when K3 opens, K0 and K1
control are invalid, and the inverter stops.
Rising edge of terminal X0 indicates forward running command; while that of terminal X1 is
reverse running command.
24V
Inverter
变频器
XV
K1
X0(P30.00=7)
K2
X1(P30.01=8)
K3
Xi
XC
Figure 7-3 3-wire running mode 1
3: 3-wire 2;
116
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
24V
K1
Inverter
变频器
XV
X0(P30.00=7)
K2
X1(P30.01=8)
K2
Rotation direction
运转方向选择
selection
0
Forward
正转
Xi
1
Reverse
反转
XC
K3
Figure 7-4 3-wire running mode 2
Terminal Xi (i=2 ~ 7) sets the function “9: 3-wire running control”.
Rising edge of terminal K1 indicates running command; when K2 opens, indicating the forward
direction command; when K3 closes, indicating the reverse direction command. When K3 opens, the
inverter stops.
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P10.02
Running command given mode
0~4
0
There are 3 different inverter running command given modes for selection.
Chapter 7
Function code
0: Operation panel running command given mode: execute the operations such as run, stop and
panel.
1: Terminal running command given mode: execute the operations such as run, stop and
forward/reverse rotation by defining the multifunctional terminals X0 ~ X7. Refer to P30.00 ~ P30.07.
2: Communication given mode: execute the operations such as run, stop and forward/reverse
rotation by means of Modbus communication. Refer to the Appendix Modbus Communication
Protocol.
3: CAN given: optional, give command by means of CANBus.
4: Profibus_DP given: optional, give command by means of Profibus_DP.
See the related supplementary agreement for communication protocol of 3, 4.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P10.03
Frequency/speed given mode 1
0~16
0
The function applies to frequency given under V/f control, vector control without sensor and
vector control with sensor. See the function code in group P10.00 for control mode.
0: Panel digital frequency given, set frequency given with P40.00
Increase or decrease the frequency with ▲ and ▼ during running, at this time, stop will be held,
but not power failure.
1: Digital multi-speed given target speed
117
Parameter Details
forward/reverse rotation with the buttons RUN (F1), STOP (F2) and LO/RE (F3) on the operation
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Digital multi-speed terminals 0-3 are effective, then frequency is determined by this terminal
combination, see P41.00 ~ P41.15.
2: Spare.
3: A0 analog target speed given
4: A0 analog current speed given
5: A1 analog target speed given
6: A1 analog current speed given
Give target speed via analog input port, at this time, output frequency is calculated according to
acceleration and deceleration time in group P40. Also give current speed, then acceleration and
deceleration time in group P40 are invalid.
7: Communication given current speed
Standard configuration, see Modbus protocol.
8: Function given target speed
Chapter 7
Macro situation in industrial applications.
9: Spare.
10: Spare.
11: Spare.
Parameter Details
12: Communication given target speed
Standard configuration, see Modbus protocol.
13: CAN given current speed
14: CAN given target speed
Optional, give speed command by means of CANBus.
15: Up/Down given speed
16: Profibus_DP given speed
Optional, give speed command by means of Profibus_DP
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P10.06
Speed limit selection
0~4
0
Select the different channel to limit speed given and avoid over-speed. It is effective only under
torque control mode.
0: Internal parameter limit:Limit by means of the upper and lower limit frequency of P70.00
and P70.01.
1: Analog 0 limit
2: Analog 1 limit: 10V corresponding to the maximum output frequency of P70.02.
3: Spare.
4: ModBus communication limit: See Modbus protocol.
118
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
5: Automatic limit
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P10.07
Frequency/speed given mode 2
0~16
0
Same as P10.03 frequency/speed given mode 1.
7.4.2 Group P11 Start Control Parameter
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.00
Start mode
0~2
0
Different start modes can be adopted according to different applications.
0: Run from the starting frequency P11.01, then accelerate to the set frequency after starting
frequency holding time P11.02.
Frequency
频率 Hz Hz
frequency
0
Chapter 7
Starting
起动频率
Forward
正转
P11.01
Starting frequency holding time
起动频率保持时间
Forward and reverse dead zone
正反转死区
P11.02
P11.02
Time s
时间
P11.01
反转
Reverse
Figure 7-5 Schematic of start mode for starting frequency
1: Firstly inject DC, to have DC excitation and braking for the motor. Injection quantity and time
is set by P11.03 and P11.04. After injection time is reached, run from the starting frequency P00.01,
then accelerate to the set frequency after starting frequency holding time P11.02.
Frequency
频率 Hz Hz
Forward
正转
P11.01
Forward and reverse dead zone
0
P11.03
P11.04
直流制动
DC braking
正反转死区
P11.02
P11.02
时间
Time s
P11.01
反转
Reverse
Figure 7-6 Schematic of start mode for DC braking
2: Speed tracking start
119
Parameter Details
Starting
起动频率
frequency
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
The inverter is able to identify the rotating speed of the motor, and execute direct tracking start
from the identified frequency. During starting, current and voltage shall be smooth, free from shock.
Power
电源
Motor
speed
电机转速
0
Switch to negative
反方向切换
direction
Inverter
output frequency
变频器输出频率
Inverter
rotation direction
变频器运转方向
Reverse
反向
Chapter 7
Motor
speed and direction detection
检测电机速度和方向
Figure 7-7 Schematic of speed tracking start mode
Parameter Details
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.01
Start holding frequency (Hz)
0.00~30.00
0.00
P11.02
Starting frequency holding time(s)
0.00~3600.00
0.00
Starting frequency is the initial frequency when the inverter starts, shown as fs in the figure.
Starting frequency holding time is the time to keep running under starting frequency of the inverter
during its starting, shown as the figure. The inverter won’t work when frequency command is below
the starting holding frequency.
Frequency Hz
频率 Hz
fmax
fs
P11.01
0
ts
P11.02
Time
时间s
s
Figure 7-8 Schematic of starting frequency and starting time
The inverter begins to run from starting frequency P11.01, then accelerate at the set acceleration
time after starting frequency holding time P11.02.
Note: for the applications with heavy load starting, it is advantageous to properly set starting
frequency holding time. Under encoder speed feedback vector control, factory default of the starting
frequency is 0.00Hz, while others are set as 0.05Hz.
120
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.03
Start DC injection current (%)
0.00~120.00
30.00
P11.04
Start DC injection time (s)
0.0~99.9
5.0
P11.03 and P11.04 are valid only when “DC braking first, then starting mode (P11.00=1)” is
chosen in start running mode, shown as the following figure:
Setting of start DC braking current (P11.03) is percentage to the inverter rated current, if the
DC braking current set is greater than 120% rated motor current, then the current injected will be
120% motor rated current. Heavy load: 0.0 ~ 120.0%; light load: 0.0 ~ 90.0%.
Note: it applies to motor open control in lifting industry. Motor open conditions are met only
when the current to start forward rotation of the motor is greater than P11.03 current value.
Start DC braking time (P11.04) is the action time injected. When P11.04=0, no DC braking
process is provided.
Output输出频率
frequency
Chapter 7
0
Time
时间
Output
voltage
输出电压
0
P11.04
Parameter Details
P11.03
Time
时间
Running
command
运行命令
Figure 7-9 DC braking schematic
Function code
P11.05
Function name
Excitation time (s)
Setting range
Factory default
0.0~99.9
0.3
Excitation time means the time to set up the flux in advance before the motor is started, with the
purpose of reaching quick response when the motor starts. When there is running command, firstly
enter the pre-excitation status according to the time set by this function code. After magnetic flux is
set up, enter the normal accelerated operation. If the function code is set as 0, indicating no exciting
process required. Excitation time default parameter is set as 0 under V/F control, modifiable. Other
control defaults are 0.3, modifiable.
Note: the motor may rotate during pre-exciting, at this time, please apply mechanical braking.
121
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Run
command
ON
time
flux
time
speed
time
P11.05
Figure 7-10 Pre-excitation schematic
Chapter 7
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.07
Brake actuation time (s)
0.0~99.99
0.20
Brake actuation time is the time from the outer brake receiving open command to being fully
opened. The brake enters zero servo time, namely zero speed holding time.
Parameter Details
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.08
Tracking delay time (ms)
0~65535
1000
The time is used to wait the motor to demagnetize. If overcurrent appears at beginning of
tracking, then it will be increased.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.09
Track zero voltage time (ms)
0~65535
100
Enter tracking waiting time.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.10
Tracking voltage Kp
0~65535
0.20
Kp during tracking. If it is too small, tracking process will be longer, otherwise overcurrent may
be caused during tracking.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.11
Tracking voltage Ki
0~6553.5
0.30
Ki during tracking. If it is too small, tracking process will be longer, otherwise overcurrent may
be caused during tracking.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.12
Tracking voltage Kd
0~6553.5
0.00
Kd during tracking. If it is too small, overshoot current won’t be controlled obviously during
tracking, otherwise, if it is too large, overcurrent may be caused during tracking.
122
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.13
Tracking exit delay (ms)
1000~65535
1000
Ensure to exit from tracking process steadily. Its increase is helpful to exit steadily.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.14
Maximum current during tracking (%)
0.0~200.0
100.0
Percentage of the motor rated current. When small inverter is used to drive large motor, ensure
the maximum current during tracking is less than the inverter rated current. If overcurrent appears
during tracking, it should be reduced.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.15
Tracking frequency change gain (%
0.0~100.0
10.0
If overvoltage or P60.09 greater than 600V appears during tracking, this value shall be
decreased.
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.16
Maximum voltage during tracking (V)
0~65535
0
This parameter is only for reading, to monitor the maximum bus voltage during tracking.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.17
Initial tracking frequency (Hz)
0.00~100.00
50.00
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.18
Maximum current during tracking (A)
0.0~6553.5
0.0
This parameter is only for reading, to monitor the maximum effective current value during
tracking.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P11.19
Reverse opening current (%)
0.00~1000.00
20.00
It applies to the motor open control in lifting industry. Open conditions will be met only when
the current to start reverse is greater than P11.19.
7.4.3 Group P12 Parking Control Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P12.00
Parking mode
0~4
0
Different parking modes will be adopted according to different applications.
0: inverter output lockout, free parking for the motor
1: slow down and stop as the set deceleration time
2: slow down and stop as the set DC braking. When the frequency is less than DC braking
starting frequency P12.03, inject DC braking current P12.04. DC braking time is determined by
P12.05.
3: slow down and stop as the set deceleration time. Excitation is kept on the motor after stop, to
fast respond to starting when running command is received.
123
Parameter Details
It is set as the maximum running frequency before tracking. If inertia parking speed of the
system drops speedily, this value may be decreased properly.
Chapter 7
Function code
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
4: Slow down and stop as the set deceleration time. Maintain the current torque at zero speed,
then stop after P12.6 lasted.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P12.01
Parking holding frequency (Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
P12.02
Parking frequency holding time (s)
0.1~99.9
0.0
The inverter decelerates to parking frequency P12.01 from its normal running speed, then slow
down to zero as the set deceleration time after parking frequency holding time P12.02, which is
advantageous to stop smoothly.
Frequency
频率 HzHz
f
Running
frequency
运行频率
Parking holding frequency
Chapter 7
停车保持频率
holding time
P12.01 Frequency
频率保持时间
0
P12.02
Time
时间 ss
Figure 7-11 Parking holding frequency schematic
Parameter Details
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P12.03
DC braking starting frequency (Hz)
0.00~10.00
2.50
P12.04
Parking DC braking current (%)
0.00~100.00
50.0
P12.05
Parking DC braking time (s)
0.0~10.0
0.5
P12.03~P12.05 are valid only when stop mode selects “deceleration + DC braking (P12.00=2)”.
Setting of parking DC braking current (P12.03) is percentage to the inverter rated current, if DC
braking current set exceeds 120% motor rated current, then the injected current will be 120% motor
rated current. Heavy load: 0.0 ~ 120.0%; light load: 0.0 ~ 90.0%.
Start current braking time (P12.04) is the injected actuation time. When P12.04=0, no DC
braking process is provided.
When P12.00=2, P12.03 can be set as braking starting frequency, to apply fast braking.
P12.03 sets DC braking current, which is percentage to the inverter rated current.
Variable torque load: 0.0 ~ 90.0%.
P12.04 sets the actuation time for DC braking.
124
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Output frequency
输出频率
P12.03
0
Time
时间
Output voltage
输出电压
P12.04
0
P12.05 Time
时间
Running command
运行命令
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P12.06
Stop excitation holding time (s)
0~65535
0
7.4.4 Group P13 Braking Function V/F Control Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P13.00
Dynamic braking selection
0~1
1
P13.01
Braking turning-on voltage
620~750
660
P13.02
Braking unit service time
0.0~300.0
60.0
P13.00 dynamic braking selection reflects whether the inverter applies dynamic braking.
0: Open dynamic braking function.
1: Dynamic braking function not used.
For the applications with big rotational inertia and fast braking & stop, braking unit and braking
resistor matched to them may be selected, also braking parameters will be set to realize fast braking
and stop.
P13.02 braking unit service time, P13.01 braking turning-on voltage are valid to the inverter
provided with built-in braking unit only.
Braking unit actuation service time can be set, generally 100s.
Regulate P13.01 to select the action voltage of braking unit, to realize fast dynamic braking and
stop.
Note: set P13.00 as 1 if built-in braking unit is applied, refer to 1.9 “Braking resistor selection”
for its components type.
125
Parameter Details
Parking mode adopts “deceleration + excitation/torque holding”, the inverter stops after
excitation/torque holding time is greater than P12.06.
Chapter 7
Figure 7-12 Parking DC braking schematic
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
7.4.5 Group P14 V/F control Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P14.00
V/F curve given
0~4
0
P14.01
V/F voltage value V0 (V)
0.0~460.0
76.0
P14.02
V/F frequency value F0 (Hz)
0.00~300.00
10.00
P14.03
V/F voltage value V1 (V)
0.0~460.0
152.0
P14.04
V/F frequency value F1 (Hz)
0.00~300.00
20.00
P14.05
V/F voltage value V2 (V)
0.0~460.0
228.0
P14.06
V/F frequency value F2 (Hz)
0.00~300.00
30.00
P14.07
V/F voltage value V3 (V)
0.0~460.0
304.0
P14.08
V/F frequency value F3 (Hz)
0.00~300.00
40.00
P14.09
V/F voltage value V4(V)
0.0~460.0
380.0
P14.10
V/F frequency value F4 (Hz)
0.00~300.00
50.00
Chapter 7
Parameter P14.00 is used to determine the different V/F curves under voltage vector V/F
control running mode (P10.00=0).
Output
voltage
Vmax
Output
voltage
Vmax
1.2 times
V3
1.5 times
Parameter Details
V2
2 times
Straight line
V1
V0
a)V/F curve
fb
Output
frequency
F0
F1
F2
F3
Output
fb frequency
b)Multi-segment V/F curve
Figure 7-13 V/F curve schematic
P14.00=0 applies to the constant torque load, sharing a linear relationship of factor 1 between V
and F. Refer to the straight line in figure for details.
P14.00=4 user-defined curve, which applies to the sectional constant torque load, shown as the
figure.
In Figure 7-12: F0<F1<F2<F3<F4≤fb, fb is the basic running frequency P40.01.
V0≤V1≤V2≤V3<V4≤Vmax, V0, V1, V2, V3 and V4 are the actual output voltage relative to
the maximum output voltage and rated frequency (V1= (Vmax/fb)* F1 default Vmax=380V,
fb=50Hz).
P14.00=1~3 applies to the variable torque load in fan and water pump. P14.00 is set as 1 ~ 3,
corresponding to 1.2-power curve, 1.5-power curve and second power curve respectively, shown as
Figure 7-12. Of which, second power curve applies to water supply, while the rest applies to other
medium liquid load. Choose the proper curve according to the actual conditions.
126
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
7.5 Group P2X Motor Parameter Groups
7.5.1 Group P20 Basic Motor Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P20.00
Motor 1 type
0~1
0
P20.01
Motor 1 rated power (kW)
0.4~400.0
P20.02
Motor 1 rated current (A)
0.1~999.9
P20.03
Motor 1 rated frequency (Hz)
0~300
50
P20.04
Motor 1 rated speed (rpm)
0~30000
1460
P20.05
Motor 1 rated voltage (V)
0~460
380
P20.06
Motor 1 poles
2~128
4
P20.07
Motor 1 rated slip frequency (Hz)
0.10~655.35
1.40
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P20.08
Motor 1 maximum slip frequency (Hz)
0.1~655.35
2.80
P20.09
Motor 1 phase sequence
0~1
1
P20.10
Motor 1 no-load current coefficient (%)
0~60.0
30.00
P20.08 sets the motor maximum slip frequency, which is 2 times of rated slip frequency
typically.
P20.09 sets the motor rotation direction, 0 is negative phase sequence rotation, while 1 is
positive phase sequence rotation.
P20.10 sets the motor no-load current coefficient, about 30% typically.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P20.13
Motor 1 maximum frequency (Hz)
0~300
50
P20.13 are used to set motor 1 maximum frequency.
127
Parameter Details
Function code
Chapter 7
P20.00 motor type: 0: asynchronous motor 1: synchronous motor
P20.01 ~ P20.07 and P20.11 are used to set motor parameters driven by the inverter. Correctly
set the parameters according to the motor nameplate prior to use.
P20.06 is used to set motor poles based on the nameplate. If no motor poles parameter is
provided on the nameplate, you can calculate it according to the following formula:
Poles = (120×f ) ÷n.
Where: n is rated speed and f is rated frequency.
For the calculated value, the even integer will be the poles.
Note: the inverter power grade shall be matched with the motor.
P20.07 is used to set the slip frequency.
If no slip frequency data is provided on the motor nameplate, you can calculate P20.07 with the
following formula:
Set rated frequency as f (P20.03), rated speed as n (P20.04) and motor poles as p (P20.06),
then: slip frequency=f-((n ×p)÷120).
For example: rated frequency 50Hz, rated speed 1430rpm and motor poles 4,
Then P20.07=50-((1430×4)÷120)=2.33Hz.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P20.14
Motor 2 type
0~1
0
P20.15
Motor 2 rated power (kW)
0.4~400.0
P20.16
Motor 2 rated current (A)
0.1~999.9
P20.17
Motor 2 rated frequency (Hz)
0~300
50
P20.18
Motor 2 rated speed (rpm)
0~30000
1460
P20.19
Motor 2 rated voltage (V)
0~460
380
P20.20
Motor 2 poles
2~128
4
P20.21
Motor 2 rated slip frequency (Hz)
0.10~655.35
1.40
P20.22
Motor 2 maximum slip frequency (Hz)
0.10~655.35
2.80
P20.23
Motor 2 phase sequence
0~1
1
P20.24
Motor 2 no-load current coefficient (%)
1.00~60.00
30.00
P20.26
Motor 2 maximum frequency (Hz)
0~300
50
P20.14 ~ P20.26 set motor 2, according to the parameters specification of motor 1.
Chapter 7
7.5.2 Group P21 Advanced Motor Parameters
Parameter Details
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P21.01
Motor 1 stator resistance (Ω)
0.000~65.000
0.072
P21.02
Motor 1 rotor resistance (Ω)
0.000~65.000
0.054
P21.03
Motor 1 stator inductance (H)
0.0000~6.0000
0.0221
P21.04
Motor 1 rotor inductance (H)
0.0000~6.0000
0.0221
P21.05
Mutual inductance 1 (H)
0.0000~6.0000
0.0210
R1
R2
L1-Lm
L2-Lm
I2
I1
Rm
1-S
U1
S
R2
Xm
I0
Figure 7-14 Circuit diagram of asynchronous motor steady state equivalent
R1, R2, L1, L2, Lm and I0 in the figure respectively stand for: stator resistance, stator inductance,
rotor resistance, rotor inductance, mutual inductance and excitation current. Excitation current may
be calculated by the rated current and power factor of the motor, also may be measured by rotation
self-tuning.
Relationship between rated torque current, excitation current and the motor rated current:
Rated torque current= power factor  motor rated current
No-load excitation current=√(1-power factor2) x motor rated current x motor efficiency,
generally the motor efficiency is 85%.
128
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
As the internal characteristic parameters, P21.01, P21.02, P21.03, P21.04 and P21.05 are only
valid to the asynchronous motor, and will be automatically obtained by the self-learning operation of
the inverter to the motor.
The key motor parameters affecting the inverter running control could be determined through
parameter self-tuning, which will be saved in the inverter automatically after parameter self-tuning is
completed, until the next parameter input or parameter self-tuning again.
Parameter self-tuning process is shown as:
Correctly input P20.00 ~ P20.11 according to the motor nameplate; correctly set the basic
running frequency P40.01, maximum output frequency P70.02 and maximum output voltage P70.03;
set the proper acceleration and deceleration time P40.02 and P40.03.
Select the mode to execute parameter self-tuning (see start menu selection):
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P21.06
Motor 2 stator resistance (Ω)
0.000~65.000
0.072
P21.07
Motor 2 rotor resistance (Ω)
0.000~65.000
0.054
P21.08
Motor 2 stator inductance (H)
0.0000~6.0000
0.0221
P21.09
Motor 2 rotor inductance (H)
0.0000~6.0000
0.0221
P21.10
Mutual inductance 2 (H)
0.0000~6.0000
0.0210
Tuning of motor 2 parameters is the same as motor 1.
Chapter 7
Function code
7.5.3 Group P23 Motor Protection Parameters
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P23.00
Motor overheat protection selection
0~2
0
P23.01
Motor sensor protection threshold value (V)
0.00~10.00
5.00
P23.02
Motor overcurrent protection time (s)
0.5~300.0
60.0
P23.00 motor overheat protection selection:
0: no protection
1: input via analog A0
2: input via analog A1
P23.01 is the set protection threshold value and P23.02 is the set overcurrent protection time.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P23.03
Motor low speed overcurrent threshold value (%)
0.00~150.00
150.00
P23.04
Motor low speed overcurrent time (s)
0.1~120.0
60.0
P23.05
Motor high speed overcurrent threshold value (%)
0.00~150.00
120.00
P23.06
Motor high speed overcurrent time (s)
0.1~60.0
30.0
P23.03 ~ P23.06 set the motor speed and overcurrent threshold value, with overspeed set within
20%. Overcurrent rate and time are inversely proportional function, the higher the overcurrent peak,
the shorter the set time. These parameters can be set after the motor report. Separate the high speed
and low speed as 20%.
129
Parameter Details
Function code
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
7.6 Group P3X Terminal Parameter Groups
7.6.1 Group P30 Digital Input Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P30.00
Terminal X0 input function selection
0~63
7
P30.01
Terminal X1 input function selection
0~63
8
P30.02
Terminal X2 input function selection
0~63
0
P30.03
Terminal X3 input function selection
0~63
0
P30.04
Terminal X4 input function selection
0~63
8
P30.05
Terminal X5 input function selection
0~63
0
P30.06
Terminal X6 input function selection
0~63
0
Definition list of function input terminals:
Chapter 7
Parameter Details
No.
Function definition
No.
0
No-function
1
2
Acceleration and deceleration time selection 1
3
Digital speed 0
4
Digital speed 1
5
Digital speed 2
6
Digital speed 3
7
Forward (FWD)
8
Reverse (REV)
9
3-wire running control
10
Spare
11
Spare
12
Spare
13
External reset terminal
14
External fault terminal
15
External self-learning input terminal
16
Emergency power supply running
17
Weighing compensation input
18
Base lockout
19
Light load switch input
20
Heavy load switch input
21
Output contactor detection
22
Brake contactor detection
23
Brake switch detection
24
Motor selection
25
Encoder selection
26
Function parameter 0 (spare)
27
Function parameter 1 (spare)
28
Pulse frequency DI0 input (spare)
29
Pulse frequency DI1 input (spare)
30
Speed/torque switching
31
Frequency increase (no hold)
32
Frequency decrease (no hold)
33
Emergency stop signal
34
FWD deceleration input
35
REV deceleration input
36
FWD stop input
37
REV stop input
38
Frequency increase (no hold)
39
Frequency decrease (no hold)
40
Inching frequency selection
41
Command switching to operation panel
42
Command switching to terminal
43
Command switching to upper computer
44
Open loop main and auxiliary given switching
45
PID main given switching to internal
46
PID main given switching to analog A0
47
auxiliary given switching to invalid
48
PID auxiliary given switching to analog A0
49
FJOG command
50
RJOG command
51
PID main given switching to analog A1
130
Function definition
Acceleration
and
deceleration
time
selection 0
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
52
PID auxiliary given switching to analog A1
Others
Spare
53
Speed given mode selection
Meaning of the function code:
0: no-function
1: acceleration and deceleration time terminal 0
2: acceleration and deceleration time terminal 1
Refer to the following table for the usage.
Acceleration and
Acceleration and
deceleration time
deceleration time
selection 0
selection 1
OFF
OFF
Acceleration and deceleration time 0 (P40.02, P40.03)
OFF
ON
Acceleration and deceleration time 1 (P40.04, P40.05)
ON
OFF
Acceleration and deceleration time 2 (P40.06, P40.07)
ON
ON
Acceleration and deceleration time 3 (P40.08, P40.09)
Acceleration and deceleration time selection
Parameter Details
131
Chapter 7
3: digital speed 0
4: digital speed 1
5: digital speed 2
6: digital speed 3
See P41.00 ~ P41.15 for the usage.
7: terminal forward input (FWD)
8: terminal reverse input (REV)
9: 3-wire running control
They are valid only in terminal running command given mode (P10.02=1). See P10.01 for the
usage.
10: spare
11: spare
12: spare
See P51.14 ~ P51.21 for the usage.
13: external reset terminal
Valid external reset terminal signal, the external signal could reset the fault of the inverter
14: external fault terminal
Valid external fault terminal signal, the inverter stops running.
15: external self-learning input terminal, magnetic pole tuning input
External input signal controls self-learning start
16: emergency power supply running
Indicate the inverter under the external emergency conditions
17: weighing compensation input
Weighting compensation command input set by the user in specific applications
18: base lockout
Effectively prohibit the inverter output
19: light load switch input
20: heavy load switch input
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
These two functions are used in elevator industry. Comparing the actual load weight with the
balance weight, if the former is less than the latter, indicating light load; otherwise heavy load.
21: output contactor feedback
It is used with output function 17 typically, to control the inverter output contactor, so as to
confirm closing status of the contactor before current is output from the inverter, and timely cut off
the inverter output meanwhile the contactor is tripping.
22: brake contactor feedback
It is used with output function 18 typically, to judge whether output contactor of the brake
closes.
23: brake limit feedback
It is used with output function 18 typically, to judge whether the brake opens.
24: motor selection
Refer to the following table for its usage:
Motor selection
Motor parameter group selection
OFF
Motor 1 parameter group
ON
Motor 2 parameter group
Chapter 7
25: encoder selection
Encoder selection
Encoder parameter group selection
OFF
Encoder 1 parameter group
ON
Encoder 2 parameter group
Parameter Details
26: function parameter 0: spare
27: function parameter 1: spare
28: pulse input 0: spare
29: pulse input 1: spare
30: speed/torque mode switching
Valid input signal, the inverter control mode is switched to torque mode from speed mode.
31: frequency increase (no hold)
When the signal is valid, target frequency continues to increase, until reaching the amplitude limit;
otherwise the current frequency will be kept. Stop and outage frequency is 0.
32: frequency decrease (no hold)
When the signal is valid, target frequency continues to decrease, until 0; while the signal is invalid,
keep the current frequency. Stop and outage frequency is 0.
33: emergency stop (snag signal)
Valid under closed loop vector control, speed regulator given 0, which makes the inverter fast stop in
the maximum reverse torque.
34: forward deceleration
Valid under the forward running conditions, target frequency 0Hz, the inverter decelerates to 0Hz.
35: reverse deceleration
Valid under the reverse running conditions, target frequency 0Hz, the inverter decelerates to 0Hz.
36: forward stop
Valid under the forward running conditions, the inverter stops.
37: reverse stop
132
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Speed given mode
OFF
P10.03 speed given mode 1
ON
P10.07 speed given mode 2
133
Parameter Details
Speed given mode selection
Chapter 7
Valid under the reverse running conditions, the inverter stops.
38: frequency increase (hold)
When the signal is valid, target frequency continues to increase, until the amplitude limit; when the
signal is invalid, keep the current frequency, the same to stop and outage.
39: frequency decrease (hold)
When the signal is valid, target frequency continues to decrease, until 0; when the signal is invalid,
keep the current frequency, the same to stop and outage.
40: inching frequency selection
This signal is valid under multi-speed running conditions, target frequency is inching frequency.
41: command switching to operation panel
Valid in stop status, command channel switching to panel given.
42: command switching to terminal
Valid in stop status, command channel switching to panel given.
43: command switching to Modbus communication
Valid in stop status, command channel switching to Modbus given.
44: open loop main and auxiliary given switching
Valid signal, speed channel source switches to open loop auxiliary given, namely P10.03 speed
channel selection switches to P50.00 given mode.
45: valid signal if PID main given switches to internal, process closed loop control main given
channel switches to digital internal given, otherwise no switching.
46: valid signal if PID main given switches to analog A0, process closed loop control main given
channel switches to A0, otherwise no switching.
47: valid signal if PID auxiliary given switches to invalid, process closed loop control auxiliary
given channel switches to invalid, otherwise no switching.
48: valid signal if PID auxiliary given switches to analog A0, process closed loop control auxiliary
given channel switches to A0, otherwise no switching.
49: FJOG command. Valid signal for inching forward command, forward running takes inching
frequency as target frequency. The inverter will stop if the signal is invalid.
50: FJOG command. Valid signal for inching reverse command, reverse running takes inching
frequency as target frequency. The inverter will stop if the signal is invalid.
Inching running shares the highest priority.
51: Valid signal when PID main given switches to analog A1, process closed loop control main
given channel switches to A1, otherwise no switching.
52: Valid signal when PID auxiliary given switches to analog A1, process closed loop control
auxiliary given channel switches to A1, otherwise no switching.
53: speed given mode selection
Refer to the following table for its usage:
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function code
Function name
Setting range
P30.07
P1-P2 terminal input function selection
Factory default
0
PTC over temperature protection input terminal: default high level, which is reduced with over
temperature signal
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P30.08
Filtering times of terminals X0~X6 and
P1-P2 (times)
0~100
5
Improve the anti-interfance ability of terminals by properly increasing P30.08. The longer their
filering times, the longer the delay times of their actions.
7.6.2 Group P31 Digital Output Parameters
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P31.00
Output K1 function definition
0~63
2
P31.01
Output K2 function definition
0~63
25
P31.02
Output K3 function definition
0~63
0
P31.03
Output K4 function definition
0~63
0
P31.04
Output K5 function definition
0~63
0
P31.05
Output K6 function definition
0~63
0
Chapter 7
Function code
Parameter Details
Y0 ~ Y1 terminal output can be defined as multifunctional digital output, also as high speed
pulse output (function 19 and 20), K1 ~ K4 relay output also may be defined as multifunctional
output, but not as pulse input.
Function definition list of multifunctional digital output:
Function set
Meaning
Function set
Meaning
0
No-function
1
RDY
2
Inverter fault
3
Running signal (RUN)
4
Frequency arrive signal (FAR)
5
Consistent frequency and speed (FDT)
6
Inverter running at zero speed
7
More than 5% rated current during running,
DC bus voltage not less than 80% rated
voltage
9
In self-tuning
10
while 10% when it stops
Speed detection 1
11
Speed detection 2
12
Output 1 for fault forecast, normal output 0
13
Self-tuning request (synchronous motor)
14
Zero servo torque direction output
15
Zero current detected
16
Generating and motoring status identification
17
Output contactor closing
18
Brake release
19
Pulse output DO0
20
Pulse output DO1
21
Radiator overheat alarm
22
Motor overheating alarm
23
Motor selection output
24
Encoder selection output
25
Brake output
26
Accumulated running time arrive
27
Single running time arrive
8
134
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function set
Meaning
Function set
Meaning
28
Output X1
29
Output X2
30
Stop undervoltage lockout
31
Fan control
32
Analog input disconnection
33
PTC alarm
34
In reverse
Parameter Details
135
Chapter 7
Note 1: setting of P31.00 ~ P31.05 defines the functions of such 6 output ports as K1 ~ K2 and
Y0 ~ Y3, whose range of value set and functions of the corresponding output port set for each value
are shown as the following:
0: no-function
1 or 101: ready (RDY)
1: Normal self-check and no trouble, the related output point connected, otherwise
disconnected;
101: Normal self-check and no trouble, the related output point disconnected, otherwise
connected;
2 or 102: inverter fault
2: The inverter is in fault shutdown status, the related output point connected, otherwise
disconnected;
102: The inverter is in fault shutdown status, the related output point disconnected, otherwise
connected;
3 or 103: inverter running signal (RUN)
3: When the inverter is able to run normally responding to running command, the related output
point connected, otherwise disconnected;
103: When the inverter is able to run normally responding to running command, the related
output point disconnected, otherwise connected;
6 or 106: In zero speed running
6: When output frequency is 0 during running, the related output point connected, otherwise
disconnected;
106: When output frequency is 0 during running, the related output point disconnected,
otherwise connected;
7 or 107: DC bus voltage not less than 85% rated value
7: When the inverter bus voltage isn’t less than 85% rated value, the related output point
connected, otherwise disconnected;
107: When the inverter bus voltage isn’t less than 85% rated value, the related output point
disconnected, otherwise connected;
8 or 108: more than 5% rated current during running, while 10% rated current during stop
8: if the above conditions are met, the related output point connected, otherwise disconnected;
108: if the above conditions are met, the related output point disconnected, otherwise
connected;
9 or 109: in self-tuning
9: when the inverter is in self-tuning status, the related output point connected, otherwise
disconnected;
109: when the inverter is in self-tuning status, the related output point disconnected, otherwise
connected;
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 7
Parameter Details
10 or 110: frequency detection 1
When the inverter output frequency reaches or exceeds any frequency detection (P31.22) plus
frequency detection width (P31.23), frequency detection 1 is triggered; after the related output point
takes action and the inverter frequency drops to any frequency detection (P31.22) again, frequency
detection 1 resets.
10: when frequency detection 1 takes action, the related output point disconnected;
110: when frequency detection 1 takes action, the related output point connected;
11 or 111: frequency detection 2
When the inverter output frequency reaches or exceeds any frequency detection (P31.22),
frequency detection 2 is triggered; after the inverter frequency drops to any frequency detection
(P31.22) again minus frequency detection width (31.23), frequency detection 2 resets.
11: when frequency detection 2 takes action, the related output point connected;
111: when frequency detection 2 takes action, the related output point disconnected;
12 or 112: fault forecast
12: during fault forecast, the related output point connected, otherwise disconnected;
112: during fault forecast, the related output point disconnected, otherwise connected;
13 or 113: inverter alarm
13: when the inverter is in alarm status but not fault shutdown, the related output point
connected, otherwise disconnected;
113: when the inverter is in alarm status but not fault shutdown, the related output point
disconnected, otherwise connected;
14 or 114: zero servo torque direction judge (for the outage emergency leveling of the motor)
14: When the inverter measures heavy load and light counterweight, the related output point
connected, otherwise disconnected;
114: When the inverter measures heavy load and light counterweight, the related output point
disconnected, otherwise connected;
15 or 115: zero current detection
15: when output current exceeds zero current detection threshold (P31.20) during stop, the
related output point connected, otherwise disconnected;
115: when output current exceeds zero current detection threshold (P31.20) during stop, the
related output point disconnected, otherwise connected;
16: generating and motoring status identification 0: motoring; 1: generating
116: generating and motoring status identification 0: generating; 1: motoring
17: output contactor closing the contactor closes for output 1
It is used with function 21, to control the contactor to close before the inverter outputs any
current
117: output contactor closing the contactor closes for output 0
18: brake release open the brake for output 1
It is used with functions 22 and 23, to control the external brake to open at the right time, and
confirm the feedback point
118: brake release open the brake for output 0
19: pulse DO0 output (spare)
119: pulse DO0 output opposite to 19 level direction (spare)
20: pulse DO1 output (spare)
136
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Parameter Details
137
Chapter 7
120: pulse DO1 output opposite to 20 level direction (spare)
21 or 121: greater than 90℃, overheat alarm
If the radiator temperature ≥80℃, the related output point connected, otherwise disconnected.
22: motor overheat alarm output
23: motor switching output
Motor selection output, the related output point disconnected: motor 1, the related output point
connected: motor 2
24: encoder switching output
Encoder selection output, the related output point disconnected: encoder 1;
Related output point connected: encoder 2
25: hoisting brake output
Brake opens, output point connected; brake closes, output point disconnected.
26: accumulated running time arrive
Accumulated running time of the inverter exceeds the time set in P31.25, output terminal
connected, other disconnected;
27: set continuous running time arrive
Single continuous running time of the inverter exceeds the time set in P31.24, output terminal
connected, other disconnected;
28: output X1
Output the level status of input terminal X1 via output terminal
29: output X2
Output the level status of input terminal X2 via output terminal
30: Under-voltage block stop, system under-voltage, effective level output of the output
terminal
31: Fan control, the inverter is in running or overheating, the output terminal connected,
otherwise disconnected after a minute delay
32: Analog input disconnection
33: PTC alarm
0~10V input type of analog A0 and A1 channel connects to motor PTC signal, P32.01 and
P32.07 are set as 6, P32.04 and P32.10 filtering time is set as 2000ms, protection threshold P23.01,
if motor PTC signal is greater than P23.01 and lasted for 2s, 52# fault will be sent.
34: in reverse
Note: “connected” above mentioned means: for the relay output, the normally open contacts
(1B and 1C, 2B and 2C) connected, while the normally closed contacts (1B and 1A, 2B and 2A)
disconnected; for the collector open circuit output, it means the output point is in low level status.
Similarly, “not connected” above mentioned means: for the relay output, the normally open contacts
(1B and 1C, 2B and 2C) disconnected, while the normally closed contacts (1B and 1A, 2B and 2A)
connected; for the collector open circuit output, it means the output point is in high resistance status.
Note 2: P31.04=3 for default set, appointing port Y0 as running signal (RUN) output port;
P31.05=2, appointing port Y1 as the inverter fault signal output port.
Note 3: running (RUN) signal given
When the inverter receives up/down direction command signal and no base lockout is provided,
running signal (RUN) only can be given.
Note 4: time sequence of fault signal
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Output the fault signal when the inverter has any fault. At the same time, running signal is
cleared. Fault signal is latched, which will be eliminated via the external input reset signal, reset
operation of the manipulator, or outage, or delay time internally set.
Time sequence of fault signal is shown as Figure 7-15.
Fault phenomenon
故障现象
Fault signal output
故障信号输出
Running signal output
运行信号输出
Figure 7-15 Time sequence of fault signal
Chapter 7
Parameter Details
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P31.06
Output K1 action delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.07
Output K1 reset delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.08
Output K2 action delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.09
Output K2 reset delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.10
Output K3 action delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.11
Output K3 reset delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.12
Output K4 action delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.13
Output K4 reset delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.14
Output Y0 action delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.15
Output Y0 reset delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.16
Output Y1 action delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
P31.17
Output Y1 reset delay (s)
0.0~60.0
0.0
Setting of signal output delay and reset delay at output end
P31.06 ~ P31.17 are time constant to set action delay and reset delay for such 6 signals as K1 ~
K4 and Y0 ~ Y1 at output end. By these parameters, delay time of the actual signal corresponding to
output status at each output end can be set as required. And delay time will be set respectively for
delay of the above output status whether in signal triggering or signal reset.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P31.20
Zero current detection threshold (%)
0.0~50.0
4.0
Zero current detection threshold of the inverter
This function is used for load change detection, set output terminal function as “15: zero current
detected”, and output the indicator signal after the inverter output current is below zero current
detection width P31.20.
When the inverter current exceeds the threshold during stop, the related output end set by
function code 15 (or 115) takes action.
Note: the function parameter is percentage of the inverter output current to the motor rated
current.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P31.21
Frequency consistence detection width (Hz)
0.00~300.00
1.00
P31.22
Any frequency detection speed (Hz)
0.00~300.00
1.00
138
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
P31.23
Any frequency detection width (Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.20
P31.21 This function is used for deviation detection between output frequency and set
frequency, set output terminal function as “4: frequency arrive signal”, when the deviation between
the inverter output frequency and set frequency is in the set range of the function code, outputs the
indicator signal, shown as the figure, frequency arrive signal FAR.
Yi represents terminals Y0-Y1 or relay terminals K1-K4.
Output frequency
P31.21
frequency
consistence
detection
width
given
frequency
P31.21
frequency
consistence
detection
width
time
OFF
ON
time
consistent given frequency
Chapter 7
terminal
Yi
Figure 7-16 Frequency consistence detection 1
139
Parameter Details
P31.22 and P31.23 are two parameters for any frequency detection: any frequency detection
width and any frequency detection width, whose combination is used for frequency/speed
consistency, frequency detection 1 and frequency detection 2, to measure whether the inverter output
frequency is in a specified frequency range. In frequency detection 1, when the inverter output
frequency reaches or exceeds frequency detection speed (P31.22) + frequency detection width
(P31.23), frequency detection 1 is triggered; after the related output point takes action and the
inverter output frequency drops to frequency detection speed (P31.22), frequency detection 1 resets.
Frequency detection 1 is negative logic, whose corresponding output status is OFF during triggering,
while ON during reset.
In frequency detection 2, when the inverter output frequency reaches or exceeds frequency
detection speed (P31.22), frequency detection 2 is triggered; after the related output point takes
action and the inverter output frequency drops to frequency detection speed (P31.22) - frequency
detection width (P31.23), frequency detection 2 resets. Frequency detection 2 is positive logic,
whose corresponding output status is ON during triggering, while OFF during reset.
Set output terminal function as “5: frequency/speed consistency”, shown as the following:
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Output frequency
P31.23 any
frequency
detection
width
P31.23 any
frequency
detection
width
P31.22 any
frequency
detection
speed
time
terminal Yi
ON
OFF
ON
time
any frequency
consistent
Figure 7-17 Frequency consistency detection 2
Set output terminal function as “10: speed detection 1”, shown as the figure.
Chapter 7
Output frequency
P31.23 any
frequency
detection
width
Parameter Details
P31.22 any
frequency
detection
speed
P31.23 any
frequency
detection
width
time
terminal Yi
ON
OFF
time
frequency detection 1
Figure 7-18 Speed detection 1
Set output terminal function as “11: speed detection 2”, shown as the figure.
Output frequency
P31.23 any
frequency
detection
width
P31.23 any
frequency
detection
width
P31.22 any
frequency
detection
speed
time
terminal Yi
OFF
ON
time
frequency detection 2
140
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Figure 7-19 Speed detection 2
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P31.24
Continuous running time arrive (h)
0~65535
2
Input the indicator signal after single continuous running time of the inverter arrives P31.24
from running command. Realize output indicator signal by defining the output terminal function
code 27.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P31.25
Accumulated running time arrive (h)
0~65535
8
Output the indicator signal after accumulated running time of the inverter arrives P31.25 from
electrification. Realize output indicator signal by defining the output terminal function code 26.
7.6.3 Group P32 Analog Input Parameters
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P32.00
A0 input type
0~3
1
P32.06
A1 input type
0~3
1
Need to set analog input type parameters:
Voltage input A0 and A1: 0: 0 ~ 10V; 1: -10V ~ 10V;
Current input: 2: 0~20mA; 3: 4~20mA.
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P32.01
A0 input function selection
0~6
0
P32.07
A1 input function selection
0~6
0
P32.01, P32.07 set input function for analog AI:
0: no-function
1: target speed signal
2: current speed signal
3: torque signal
4: compensation torque signal
When frequency given mode P10.03=3, 5, 7, A0 and A1 will be automatically set as 1
When frequency given mode P10.03=4, 6, 8, A0 and A1 will be automatically set as 2
When torque given mode P10.04=1, 2, 3, A0 and A1 will be automatically set as 3
When compensation torque given mode P10.05=2, 3, 4, A0 and A1 will be automatically set as
4.
5: speed limit signal
6: motor PTC signal
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P32.02
A0 offset(V)
0.000~20.000
10.000
P32.03
A0 gain(%)
0.1~1000.0
100.0
P32.04
A0 filtering time (ms)
0~65535
10
P32.05
A0amplitude limit (V)
0.000~20.000
10.000
P32.08
A1offset (V)
0.000~10.000
10.000
141
Parameter Details
Function code
Chapter 7
Function code
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
P32.09
A1 gain (%)
0.1~1000.0
100.0
P32.10
A1filtering time (ms)
0~65535
10
P32.11
A1 amplitude limit(V)
0.000~10.000
10.000
Chapter 7
P32.02 ~ P32.05 and P32.08 ~ P32.11 are used to set offset, gain, filtering time and amplitude
limit for two analog input ports separately.
Offset concludes: voltage type: 0.000 offset-10.000V; 10.000 offset 0V; 20.000 offset
+10.000V,
Gain is a proportionality coefficient, it is 100% typically.
Proper adjustment of filterring time can improve anti-interference ability of terminal input,
because analog input via A0 and A1 is provided with interferance signal in field applications, yet the
longer the filtering time of the terminal, the longer its response delay.
Amplitude limit is only to limit the analog input final processing signal within a scope with
certain control need, for current type, it needs to change amplitude limit as 20.000mA.
Actual input = analog input * gain + offset
Example 1: analog input 0~10V is speed given, whose actual corresponding input power is
0-the maximum motor frequency P20.13, need to set gain 100% and offset 10.000V
Example 2: analog input 1~10V is speed given, whose actual corresponding input frequency is
0-the maximum motor frequency P20.13, need to set gain 100% and offset 9.000V
7.6.4 Group P33 Analog Output Parameters
Parameter Details
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P33.00
M0 output function selection
0~16
1
P33.03
M1 output function selection
0~16
2
Analog DAC monitoring digital output 0-1000 represents 0-10.00V
Function definition list of multi-function analog output (partial common monitoring data):
Function set
Definition
Corresponding relation
0
No-function
1
Output current
0~Ie corresponding to 0~10V
2
Output voltage
0~Ue corresponding to 0~10V
3
Torque given
0~Te corresponding to 0~10V
4
Bus voltage
0~Udc corresponding to 0~10V
5
Output total power
0~P corresponding to 0~10V
6
Output active power
0~Pe corresponding to 0~10V
7
Current speed (no sign)
0~Ne corresponding to 0~10V
8
Speed given (with sign)
0~Ne corresponding to 0~10V
9
Speed feedback (with sign)
0~Ne corresponding to 0~10V
10
Acceleration
0~50Hz/s corresponding to 0~10V
11
Radiator temperature
0~100℃ corresponding to 0~10V
12
Analog A0
0~10V corresponding to output 0~10V
13
Analog A1 input
0~10V corresponding to output 0~10V
14
Analog A2 (spare)
0~10V corresponding to 0~10V
142
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Function set
Definition
Corresponding relation
15
ModBus analog output 0
0~10000 corresponding to 0~10V
16
ModBus analog output 1
0~10000 corresponding to 0~10V
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P33.01
M0 offset (V)
0.00~20.00
15.00
P33.02
M0 gain (%)
0.1~6000.0
100.0
P33.04
M1 offset (V)
0.00~20.00
15.00
P33.05
M1 gain (%)
0.1~6000.0
100.0
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P33.06
M0 analog output type
0~4
0
P33.07
M1 analog output type
0~4
0
P33.06 and P33.07 are used to select analog output type:
0: no selection; 1: 0~10V; 2: -10V~10V; 3: 0~20mA; 4: 4~20mA.
Automatically set the corresponding analog output offset and gain, as well as default
corresponding output 0-rated current/speed, etc. after type selection;
1: 0~10V default: offset 15.000 gain 200.0%
2: -10V~10V default: offset 15.000 gain 200.0%
3: 0~20mA default: offset 10.500 gain 385.0%
4: 4~20mA default: offset 12.150 gain 312.0%
143
Parameter Details
Function code
Chapter 7
This function can be used to adjust the analog output defined in the above table. Analog after
adjustment is the actual output of terminal M.
Differing from other function code, adjustment of the above parameters will exert real-time
influence on M output.
Output correction mode of M0 and M1 is the same.
Actual output = M output * gain + offset
Actual output voltage range -10V~10V
When the parameters have been set:
Example 1: output is frequency 0~50.00Hz (rated frequency)
Set the gain as 100% and the offset as 15.000V
Actual output voltage is 0V for 0Hz, 5V for 50.00Hz
Example 2: output is frequency 0~50.00Hz (rated frequency)
Set the gain as 200% and the offset as 15.000V
Actual output voltage is 0V for 0Hz, 10V for 50.00Hz
Example 3: output is output current 0~2Ie (rated current)
Set the gain as 50% and the offset as 15.000V
Actual output voltage is 0V for 0A , 2Ie for 5V.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
7.7 Group P4X Speed Parameter Groups
7.7.1 Group P40 Basic Speed Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P40.00
Panel speed
0.0~300.0
5.0
Panel given starting speed can be changed with button.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P40.01
Basic frequency
0.0~300.0
50.0
Basic running frequency is the corresponding minimum frequency when the inverter outputs the
maximum voltage. When the standard AC motor is applied, it corresponds to the motor rated
frequency, refer to the motor nameplate.
Chapter 7
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P40.02
Acceleration time 0 (s)
0.10~360.00
5.00
P40.03
Deceleration time 0 (s)
0.10~360.00
5.00
Parameter Details
The function sets the frequency from accelerated running to constant speed or from constant
decelerated running to stop after the inverter starts to run.
Acceleration time 0: the time P40.02 of the inverter output frequency increasing from zero
frequency to the maximum frequency
Deceleration time 0: the time P40.03 of the inverter output frequency decreasing from the
maximum frequency to zero frequency
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P40.04
Acceleration time 1 (s)
0.10~360.00
5.00
P40.05
Deceleration time 1 (s)
0.10~360.00
5.00
P40.06
Acceleration time 2 (s)
0.10~360.00
5.00
P40.07
Deceleration time 2 (s)
0.10~360.00
5.00
P40.08
Acceleration time 3 (s)
0.10~360.00
5.00
P40.09
Deceleration time 3 (s)
0.10~360.00
5.00
Besides the acceleration time 0 (P40.2) and deceleration time 0 (40.03) defined above,
additional 3 groups of acceleration time and deceleration time (acceleration time 1 and deceleration
time 1, acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2, acceleration time 3 and deceleration time 3) can
be defined, to select the different acceleration and deceleration in different terminal status by means
of defining the multifunctional terminal X (acceleration and deceleration time selection function 1 ~
2). Meaning of these 3 groups of acceleration time and deceleration time is the same as P40.02 and
P40.03.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P40.10
Acceleration circular arc 0 (s)
0.00~10.00
0.00
P40.11
Acceleration circular arc 1 (s)
0.00~10.00
0.00
P40.12
Deceleration circular arc 0 (s)
0.00~10.00
0.00
P40.13
Deceleration circular arc 1 (s)
0.00~10.00
0.00
144
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Acceleration and deceleration circular arc: to improve the time P40.10-P40.13 of arc segment
increased due to smoothness of starting and terminate section during acceleration and deceleration.
Segmental arc curve time applies to the conveyor belt transporting fragile goods or the applications
requiring smooth speed control.
P40.10 ~ P40.13 are to set S curve (speed curve) during motor running under switching
multi-speed given, they specify the acceleration time (P40.02), deceleration time (P40.03),
acceleration circular arc time (P40.10 and P40.11) and deceleration circular arc time (P40.12 and
P40.13), which directly affect the characteristics of S curve, therefore directly relating to the motor
running efficiency and seating comfort. Specific position of the above parameters in motor running S
speed curve is shown as Figure 7-20.
Speed V
P40.11
P40.12
P40.02
P40.03
Time t
Figure 7-20 Position of S curve in motor running
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P41.00
Digital multi-speed
given 0(Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
P41.01
Digital multi-speed
given 1(Hz)
0.00~300.00
5.00
P41.02
Digital multi-speed
given 2(Hz)
0.00~300.00
10.00
P41.03
Digital multi-speed
given 3(Hz)
0.00~300.00
20.00
P41.04
Digital multi-speed
given 4(Hz)
0.00~300.00
30.00
P41.05
Digital multi-speed
given 5(Hz)
0.00~300.00
40.00
P41.06
Digital multi-speed
given 6(Hz)
0.00~300.00
50.00
P41.07
Digital multi-speed
given 7(Hz)
0.00~300.00
60.00
P41.08
Digital multi-speed
given 8(Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
P41.09
Digital multi-speed
given 9(Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
P41.10
Digital multi-speed
given 10(Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
P41.11
Digital multi-speed
given 11(Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
P41.12
Digital multi-speed
given 12(Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
P41.13
Digital multi-speed
given 13(Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
P41.14
Digital multi-speed
given 14(Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
P41.15
Digital multi-speed
given 15(Hz)
0.00~300.00
0.00
They can be considered as process open loop frequency given, to select different multistage
145
Parameter Details
7.7.2 Group P41 Digital Multi-speed Parameters
Chapter 7
P40.13
P40.10
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
frequency given in different terminal status by defining the multifunctional terminal X (digital
multistage 0 ~ 3). ON means the valid terminal, OFF means the invalid terminal.
Note: during process open loop running, if input terminal function sets analog and digital
multistage simultaneously, then the digital multistage shares high priority.
P41.00 ~ P41.15 respectively defines the speed command value of digital multi-speed given 1 ~
15. Four input point binary system codes of switching multi-speed given 0 ~ 3 combine 16 kinds of
status, which are corresponding to the above 15 given speed commands from P41.00 to P41.15 and 0
given speed (combination code=0) . Corresponding relation between multi-speed input port signal
and given speed given is shown as Table 6.2.
Table 6.2 Corresponding relation between multi-speed input port combination and given speed
Chapter 7
Parameter Details
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
combination code
given 3
given 2
given 1
given 0
0
0
0
0
0
Given speed 0
1
0
0
0
1
Given speed 1
2
0
0
1
0
Given speed 2
3
0
0
1
1
Given speed 3
4
0
1
0
0
Given speed 4
5
0
1
0
1
Given speed 5
6
0
1
1
0
Given speed 6
7
0
1
1
1
Given speed 7
8
1
0
0
0
Given speed 8
9
1
0
0
1
Given speed 9
10
1
0
1
0
Given speed 10
11
1
0
1
1
Given speed 11
12
1
1
0
0
Given speed 12
13
1
1
0
1
Given speed 13
14
1
1
1
0
Given speed 14
15
1
1
1
1
Given speed 15
Given speed
In the table, status 0 shows no signal at input port; status 1 shows input signal at input port.
Further explanation with an example: if speed given 0 has input signal, speed given 1 has input
signal, speed given 2 has no input signal and speed given 3 has no input signal, then binary coding
will be “0011”=3, whose corresponding given speed is given speed 3, and its given speed value will
be appointed by P41.03.
Function code
Name
Setting range
Default value
P41.16
Inching frequency given (Hz)
0.00~50.00
5.00
Frequency set value set by inching operation.
146
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
7.8 Group P5X Process Control Parameter Groups
7.8.1 Group P50 Process Open Loop Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P50.00
Open loop auxiliary given mode
0~5
0
Select process open loop auxiliary given mode P50.00 as following:
0: nil; 1: A0; 2: A1; 3: spare; 4: spare; 5: PID given target speed
Figure 7-21 Schematic of open loop auxiliary given
Function code
P50.01
Function name
Open loop given main and auxiliary
relation calculation
P50.01
Factory default
0~6
0
fcom
fa
Figure 7-22 Schematic of open loop main and auxiliary given combination
Under the process open loop control mode, an auxiliary given value fa is overlaid on the main
given value fm, to generate process open loop combination frequency given fcom=fm+fa.
Main given value fm and auxiliary given value fa are able to have addition, subtraction, offset,
maximization and minimization calculation.
Process loop given main and auxiliary relation calculation P50.01 is defined as follows:
0: no calculation
1: main given + auxiliary given: auxiliary frequency given value is overlaid on the main given,
with the function “plus”。
147
Parameter Details
fm
Setting range
Chapter 7
P10.03 main given value fm gives fc, input 44 via the digital: open loop main and auxiliary
given are switched to auxiliary given value, the main given value fm is switched to auxiliary given
value fa.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Frequency
fcom
fmax
fa
fm
time
Figure 7-23 Open loop main and auxiliary given calculation 0
Process open lop combination given fcom=main given fm+auxiliary given fa
2: Main given-auxiliary given: auxiliary frequency given value is overlaid on the main given,
with the function “minus”.
Frequency
Chapter 7
fa
fm
Parameter Details
time
fcom
Figure 7-24 Open loop main and auxiliary given calculation 1
Process open loop combination given fcom=main given fm-auxiliary given fa
3: spare. 4: spare.
5: maximization: take the maximum value from the main given fm and auxiliary given fa.
Frequency
fa
fcom
fm
time
Figure 7-25 Open loop main and auxiliary given calculation 4
Process open loop combination given fcom=Max{main given fm , auxiliary given fa}
6: Minimization: take the minimum value from the main given fm and auxiliary given fa.
148
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Frequency
fa
fm
fcom
Time
Figure 7-26 Open loop main and auxiliary given calculation 5
Process open loop combination given fcom=Min{ main given fm , auxiliary given fa}
Note: when the frequency corresponding to the resultant fcom exceeds the upper and lower
frequency limit, output frequency is limited to the upper and lower limit.
7.8.2 Group P51 Process Close Loop Parameters
Analog
feedback
closed
loop
P51.07
Proportional gain
P51.09
+
ε
P51.14~P51.21
AI0
Integral mode
selection
P51.13
Deviation limit
-
+
Integral gain
P51.10
+
Differential gain
P51.11
AI1
+
Analog
feedback
closed loop
Kd×( ε - ε′)
AI2
Set P51.04-P51.06
Closed loop
feedback quantity
Sampling period
P51.12
AI0
Closed
loop output
AI1
AI2
DI
ε´ is last deviation,ε is this deviation
Figure 7-27 PID functional block diagram
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.00
Closed loop run control selection
0~1
0
Closed loop running control selection
0: invalid
1: valid
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.01
Closed loop control main given mode
0~6
0
P51.02
Closed loop control auxiliary given mode
0~6
2
P51.03
Closed loop given main and auxiliary calculation
0~6
0
149
Closed
loop
feedback
Parameter Details
Set P51.07-P51.08
Chapter 7
PID control is a common method for process control, to have proportional calculation, integral
calculation and differential calculation for the feedback signal of controlled variable and the
deviation of target signal, so as to adjust the inverter frequency and form negative feedback system,
making the controlled volume to be more than the target volume. This method applies to flow
control, pressure control and temperature control. The basic control functional block diagram is
shown as:
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
In the closed loop system with feedback, if main and auxiliary given are available, the main
given value may be internal given, analog and communication; and the auxiliary given value may be
analog and communication.
P51.01 closed loop control main given mode selection is shown as:
0: internal given (P51.07); 1: A0; 2: A1; 3: spare; 4: spare; 5: spare; 6: Modbus communication
P51.02 closed loop control auxiliary given mode selection is shown as:
0: nil; 1: A0; 2: A1; 3: spare; 4: spare; 5: spare; 6: Modbus communication given;
P51.03 closed loop control given main and auxiliary calculation selection is shown as:
0: no calculation; 1: main+auxiliary; 2: main-auxiliary; 3: spare; 4: spare; 5: take the maximum
value; 6: take the minimum value
Closed loop given main and auxiliary function is the same as open loop given main and
auxiliary calculation function, see details of P50.01.
Note: closed control analog main given, auxiliary given, main feedback and auxiliary feedback
can’t be set as the same channel.
Chapter 7
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.04
Closed loop control main feedback mode
0~6
1
P51.05
Closed loop control auxiliary feedback mode
0~6
2
0~6
0
P51.06
Closed loop control feedback main and
auxiliary calculation
Parameter Details
In the closed loop system with feedback, the main and auxiliary feedback may be analog or
pulse quantity. Process closed loop feedback main and auxiliary calculation function is the same as
that of closed loop and process open loop given, see the details of P50.01.
P51.04: closed loop control main feedback mode selection is shown as:
0: nil; 1: A0; 2: A1; 3: spare; 4: spare; 5: spare; 6: Modbus communication given;
P51.05: closed loop control auxiliary feedback mode selection is shown as:
0: nil; A0; 2: A1; 3: spare; 4: spare; 5: spare; 6: Modbus communication given;
P51.06 closed loop control feedback main and auxiliary calculation selection is shown as:
0: no calculation; 1: main +auxiliary; 2: main-auxiliary; 3: spare; 4: spare; 5: take the maximum
value; 6: take the minimum value
Note: closed control analog main given, auxiliary given, main feedback and auxiliary feedback
can’t be set as the same channel.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.07
PID internal given value
0.00~10.00
0.70
P51.08
Unit
0~3
0
Before determine the process closed loop given quantity, firstly the current control running
mode P51.00=1 shall be determined firstly. When the current control running mode is analog
feedback process closed loop, if P51.00 is set as 0, then the closed loop given quantity is determined
by P51.07.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.09
Proportional gain Kp
0.000~10.000
0.500
P51.10
Integral gain Ki
0.000~10.000
0.500
150
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
P51.11
Differential gain Kd
0.000~10.000
0.000
The bigger the Kp, the faster the response, but oscillation may be caused if it is too big. Kp isn’t
able to eliminate the deviation completely, Ki may be adopted to eliminate the residual deviation; the
bigger the Ki, the faster response to the deviation of the inverter, but oscillation may be caused if it is
too big. If hopping feedback appears in system, Kd is required, which is able to rapidly response to the
system feedback and given deviation change. The bigger the Kd, the faster the response, but
oscillation may be caused if it is too big. On-line modification and E2ron operation will be executed.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.13
Integral selection mode
0~1
0
The function determines the specific operation mode during process closed loop regulation.
If output of the process closed loop regulation reaches upper or lower frequency limit (P70.00 or
P70.01), two actions for selection are available in integration element.
unchanged, if the trend between given quantity and feedback quantity changes, integral quantity will
change rapidly with this trend.
1: Continue integral regulation if frequency reaches the upper or lower limit; integral quantity
Chapter 7
0: Stop integral regulation if frequency reaches the upper or lower limit; integral quantity keeps
makes real-time response to the change between given quantity and feedback quantity, unless the
changes, more time is needed to offset the influence of continued integral, therefore the integral
quantity is able to follow change of the trend.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.22
Integral action upper limit (%)
0~
100.00
P51.24
Closed loop input upper limit (%)
0~
50.0
P51.25
Closed loop input lower limit (%)
0.0~20.0
0.0
P51.26
Closed loop output upper limit (%)
0.0~
100.0
P51.22 is used with P51.13, when P51.13=1, limit value set by P51.22 shall be valid.
P51.23 closed loop output reverse selection: spare
P51.24 ~ P51.26 set limit value in process closed loop control, regulate it according to the upper
limit if it exceeds P51.24, while no PID regulation is made if it is below the lower limit, set the limit
value in process closed loop control.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.28
Sleep selection
0~1
0
P51.29
Sleep frequency(Hz)
0.00~50.00
30.00
P51.30
Sleep delay(s)
0.00~655.35
10.00
P51.31
Wake up deviation(%)
0.00~100.00
0.10
151
Parameter Details
internal integral limit has been reached. When the trend between given quantity and feedback quantity
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
P51.32
Wake up delay(s)
0~3600.0
10.0
Sleep parameters:
P51.28 sleep selection: 0 invalid; 1 valid
When sleep selection is valid, set sleep frequency, sleep delay, wake up deviation and wake up
delay.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.33
Given acceleration and deceleration time
0.0~50.0
0.0
P51.34
Closed loop output filtering time
0.00~50.000
0.01
When the closed loop given changes suddenly, regulate these two parameters to make the given
control within a certain response time, so as to make the response to the closed loop process in some
environment more smoothly.
Chapter 7
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.35
Minimum given quantity
0.0~100.0
0.0
0.0~100.0
0.0
0.0~100.0
10.0
0.0~100.0
10.0
P51.36
P51.37
P51.38
Feedback quantity corresponding to
minimum given quantity
Maximum given quantity
Feedback quantity corresponding to
maximum given quantity
Parameter Details
P51.35 ~ P51.38 define the relation curve of analog closed loop given and expected feedback
quantity, whose set value will be the percentage of the actual given and feedback quantity to the
reference value (10V or 20mA).
Feedback
quantity
correspondin
g to minimum
given
Feedback
quantity
correspondin
g to
maximum
given
Minimum
given
Maximum
given
Figure 7-28 Feedback positive regulation
152
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Feedback
quantity
corresponding
to minimum
given
Feedback
quantity
corresponding
to maximum
given
Minimum
given
Maximum
given
Figure 7-29 Feedback negative regulation
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.39
Preset frequency (Hz)
0.001~ maximum frequency
22.0
P51.40
Preset frequency holding time (s)
0~60
0
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P51.41
Deviation negation
0~1
0
7.9 Group P6X High-Performance Control Parameter Groups
7.9.1 Group P60 Speed Control Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P60.03
Speed loop low speed P
0.00~655.35
100.00
P60.04
Speed loop low speed I
0.00~655.35
5.00
P60.05
Speed loop low speed D
0.00~655.35
0.50
P60.06
Speed loop medium speed P
0.00~655.35
70.00
P60.07
Speed loop medium speed I
0.00~655.35
2.00
P60.08
Speed loop medium speed D
0.00~655.35
0.20
P60.09
Speed loop high speed P
0.00~655.35
70.00
P60.10
Speed loop high speed I
0.00~655.35
2.00
P60.11
Speed loop high speed D
0.00~655.35
0.10
P60.12
Switching frequency 0(%)
0.0~6553.5
10.0
P60.13
Switching frequency 1(%)
0.0~6553.5
60.0
P60.14
V/FVC 滤波时间(ms)
0~65535
15
PID regulation for speed loop, P0, I0 and D0 are taken as zero servo section regulation
153
Parameter Details
Whether negate the comparative result from the feedback signal and the set value or not, 0: no
negation; 1: deviation negation.
Chapter 7
After closed loop operation starts, the frequency firstly will be accelerated to closed loop preset
frequency P51.38 according to acceleration time, then run as per the closed loop characteristics after
continuously having run a period of time at this frequency point. If closed loop preset frequency
function isn’t required, preset frequency and holding time both can be set as 0.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Chapter 7
Parameter Details
parameters, the rest 3 groups of parameters are divided into 3 groups by P60.12 and P60.13, P1, I1
and D1 are low speed section regulation parameters, P2, I2 and D2 are medium speed section
regulation parameters, and P3, I3 and D3 are high speed section regulation parameters.
P60 parameter group mainly regulates the proportional gain and integral time of speed
regulator.
Proportional gain P:
Make adjustment according to the mechanical rotational inertia connected to the motor. For the
mechanical device with big rotational inertia, please increase P gain; for that with small rotational
inertia, please decrease P gain.
When P gain is greater than inertia, although control response can be quicken, oscillation or
overshoot may be caused to the motor; on the contrary, if P gain is less than inertia, control response
becomes slow, the time for speed regulation to the steady value will be longer.
Integral time I:
When it is set as 0, indicating invalid integral (control P independently). Please set integral time
I as non-zero value if deviation between the speed command and actual speed under the stable status
is 0. When I is smaller, system response is fast, with oscillation if it is too small; while I is bigger,
system response is slow.
Derivative time D:
generally it doesn’t need to be regulated and is set according to the default. The parameter is
able to quickly respond the change of system feedback and given deviation. The bigger the value, the
faster the response, but oscillation may be caused if it is too big. It is valid if it is set as 0.
PID set value adjustment at high speed, medium speed and low speed:
When the motor speed is higher than switching frequency 01, P60.09 ~ P60.11 will work,
making the system reach the good dynamic response without any oscillation; when the motor speed
is lower than switching frequency 0, P60.03 ~ P60.05 will work. In order to realize better dynamic
response at low speed, proportional gain P60.03 can be properly increased and integral time P60.04
can be reduced. When the speed is below switching frequency 1 and higher than switching frequency
0, P60.06 ~ P60.08 will work.
Given curve
Big feedback
curve P
Small feedback
curve P
Figure 7-33 Influence of proportional constant P on feedback track
154
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Big feedback
curve I
Given curve
Figure 7-34 Influence of integral constant I on feedback track
7.9.2 Group P61 Current Control Parameters
Setting range
Factory default
P61.00
Current loop Kp
0.01~9.99
1.40
P61.01
Current loop Ki
0.01~9.99
1.00
P61.02
Current loop Kd
0.00~9.99
0.00
P61.03
Current loop bandwidth (Hz)
0.1~1000.0
400.0
P61.04
Magnetic link bandwidth (Hz)
0.1~1000.0
0.8
P61.05
Current loop selection
0~10
0
P61.06
V/F control current loop Max
0.0~100.0
1.0
P61.07
V/F control current loop Min
0.0~100.0
1.0
Group P61 mainly carries out PID regulatin for current loop, typically no regulation provides
and set it according to the default.
7.10 Group P7X Enhanced Control Parameter Groups
7.10.1 Group P70 Limit and Protection Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P70.00
Upper frequency limit (Hz)
0.01~ max frequency
50.00
P70.01
Lower frequency limit (Hz)
0.01~ Upper frequency limit
0.00
P70.02
Maximum output frequency (Hz)
0.01~300.00
55.00
Maximum output frequency fmax is the highest frequency permitted to be output by the
inverter.
Maximum output voltage Vmax is the output voltage when the inverter is running at the basic
running frequency. If a standard AC motor is applied, it is the motor rated voltage, see the motor
nameplate.
Upper and lower frequency limit fH and fL are the highest and lowest frequency set for the
motor operation as required by production process during application of the user.
155
Parameter Details
Function name
Chapter 7
Function code
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Output voltage
Vmax
fL
fH
fb
Output
frequency
fmax
Figure 7-35 Schematic of the upper and lower frequency limit
Chapter 7
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P70.04
Output torque limit (%)
0.00~200.00
150.00
0.00~200.00
160.00
540~800
750
0.00~
120.00
P70.05
Parameter Details
P70.06
P70.07
Inverter acceleration
overcurrent threshold value (%)
Inverter deceleration
overvoltage threshold value (V)
Overspeed protection
coefficient (%)
P70.04 ~ P70.06 set overcurrent and overvoltage threshold for the inverter. In general, when the
set speed or the motor load experiences rapid change, output current of the inverter may be greater
than the overcurrent protection point, resulting overcurrent fault. Current limit function is that the
inverter limits output current with sudden change not greater than the protection action value by
means of controlling the transient output, so as to effectively reduce overcurrent fault and guarantee
the continuous and reliable operation of the system. When the current exceeds a certain value
(P70.04), the inverter enters current limit status; during the constant speed operation, load capacity
may be ensured via current limit, free from any overcurrent fault. When the load is reduced, the
inverter automatically exits from current limit status and restores to normal operation. The function
is especially suitable in the applications with rapid speed or load change.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P70.08
Special function selection
0~65535
16
Set the parameter according to bit, with its specific meaning as: for example 16, indicating the
classic speed loop selected for speed loop.
bit3: 8 whether calculate the rotor time constant based on the motor parameters or not (1: based
on motor parameters; 0: based on slip frequency);
bit4: 16 Small speed drop for sudden increased load; small speed increase for sudden decreased
load.
bit5: 32 undervoltage alarm (1: no alarm; 0: alarm)
156
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
bit7: 128 zero servo mode (1: calculate zero servo torque based on acceleration; 0: calculate
zero servo torque based on feedback speed)
bit8: 256 encoder phase angle self-learning for every operation (1: Y; 0: once only for
electrification)
bit10: 1024 bus voltage compensation for the emergency power operation (1: compensation; 0:
no compensation)
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P70.10
PT signal channel
0~2
0
P70.11
PT protection upper threshold (V)
0.000~10.000
10.000
P70.12
PT protection lower threshold(V)
0.000~10.000
0.000
P70.13
PT protection action delay (s)
0.0~10.0
3.0
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P70.14
HT signal channel
0~2
0
P70.15
HT protection upper threshold (V)
0.000~10.000
10.000
P70.16
HT protection lower threshold(V)
0.000~10.000
0.000
P70.17
HT protection action delay (s)
0.0~10.0
3.0
HT signal channel selection (0: NC 1: AI0 2: AI1).
Trigging conditions for 50# fault (Humidity fault): “HT > P70.15” or “PT < P70.16” continues
the time set in P70.17.
Clearing conditions for 50# fault (Humidity fault): “P70.16<PT <P70.15”; clear the fault after it
is continues for 2s.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P70.18
Bus undervoltage threshold (V)
0~540
380
400V bus undervoltage threshold default is 380V.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P70.21
PWM detection delay (s)
0~65535
800
After the inverter starts to run, if output current is 0 and after parameter PWM detection delay,
the inverter sends 51# fault.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P70.22
Selection below the tower frequency limit
0~3
0
Set the running mode when target frequency is below the lower frequency limit:
0: run at the lower frequency limit;
1: stop;
2: run at zero speed;
3: inertia stop;
157
Parameter Details
Function code
Chapter 7
PT70.10 : PT signal channel selection (0: NC 1: AI0 2: AI1).
Triggering conditions for 49# fault (PT detection fault): after the inverter has run for 5s, “PT >
P70.11” or “PT < P70.12” will continue the time set in P70.13;
Clearing conditions for 49# fault (PT detection fault): the inverter stops or clear the fault after
“P70.12<PT P70.11” continues for 2s.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
7.10.2 Group P71 Control Optimization Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.00
Frequency hopping speed 1(Hz)
0.00~100.00
0.00
P71.01
Frequency hopping speed 2(Hz)
0.00~100.00
0.00
P71.02
Frequency hopping speed 3(Hz)
0.00~100.00
0.00
P71.03
Frequency hopping speed (Hz)
0.00~100.00
0.00
In order to avoid the mechanical resonance point, set the frequency hopping range for the
inverter. The inverter set frequency will be automatically adjusted to frequency hopping section to
run when it drops into the frequency hopping. Frequency hopping section ranges from frequency
hopping speed - 0.5 * frequency hopping width to frequency modulation speed + 0.5 * frequency
hopping width, with 3 frequency modulation sections set totally.
Chapter 7
Frequency
hopping 3
(P71.02)
0.5*
P71.03
Frequency
hopping 2
(P71.01)
Frequency
hopping 1
(P71.00)
0.5*
P71.03
Parameter Details
Set
frequency
Figure 7-36 Upper and lower frequency hopping limit
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.04
Inertia compensation factor (%)
0.00~100.00
0.00
P71.05
No reverse
0~1
0
P71.06
FWD and REV interval time (s)
0.0~6553.5
0.0
P71.07
PWM modulation mode(s)
0~2
2
Rotational inertia compensation factor is determined by P71.04. When the system is in torque
control mode and has big system load inertia, it needs to provide the additional rotational inertia
compensation during its acceleration and deceleration. For some production equipment, reverse
rotation may cause equipment damage. Therefore this function may be adopted to prohibit reverse
rotation.
P71.05 factory default: reverse permitted, P71.05=1: no reverse.
When rotation direction of the motor is opposite to that required by the equipment, wiring of
any two terminals on output side of the inverter can be exchanged, making the forward direction of
the equipment to be consistent with that defined by the inverter.
P71.06 sets the waiting time of the inverter from forward to reverse (or from reverse to forward)
158
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
when the speed exceeds 0.
Output
frequency
P71.06
Time
Figure 7-37 Dead time from forward to reverse
P71.07 selects PWM modulation mode. 0: 5-secton type; 1: 7-section type; 2: <40%rpm
7-section, >40% rpm 5-section.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.08
V/F optimization function selection (%)
0~127
32
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.09
V/F torque compensation (%)
0.0~30.0
0.0
P71.10
V/F compensation maximum frequency (Hz)
0.0~50.0
10.0
P71.09 provides the manual compensation torque during V/F control, to effectively improve
low speed torque
P71.10 provides the maximum frequency for compensation torque during V/F control
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.11
Dead zone compensation mode
0~2
0
Dead zone compensation mode
0: compensate 100% as per angle;
1: compensate 50% as per angle;
2: make compensation as per current;
Generally no adjustment.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.14
Carrier frequency kHz)
1.1~8.0
2.0
P71.15
Random PWM width (kHz)
0.000~1.000
0.000
Carrier frequency regulation: when the inverter motor is too noisy, increase carrier frequency to
lighten it. Random PWM width can regulate the carrier frequency section, for example: when carrier
frequency is 6 and random width is 1KHz, carrier frequency randomly changes within 5.5-6.5, which
also is used to reduce the motor noise.
159
Parameter Details
Function code
Chapter 7
0: Nil
1: torque automatic lifting to improve the low speed loading performance;
2: oscillation suppression to control the motor oscillation during no load and light load;
4: slip compensation to improve speed control precision;
8: stator resistance compensation to improve the low speed loading performance;
16: dead zone compensation to improve voltage precision;
32: bus voltage compensation to stabilize the output voltage;
(bit selection function)
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Note: default carrier frequency of AS series is related to the inverter power, the bigger the
power, the lower the default carrier frequency. If the default value is exceeded, please derate it,
derating 10% for each increase of 1K.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.16
Regulator mode
0~3
1
Regulation period of speed loop when set the vector control, 0: 0.5ms,1: 1ms,2: 4ms 3: 4ms,
the bigger the value, the slower the speed regulation, to reduce the electromagnetic noise of the
motor.
Regulator mode is different according to the different default carrier frequency of the inverter.
When the default carrier frequency ≥4kHz, default regulation mode is 1; when the default carrier
frequency ≤3kHz, default regulation mode is 2.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.22
Zero speed threshold (Hz)
0.0~10.0
0.2
P71.22 sets zero speed threshold, default 0.2Hz. If the actual running frequency is below the set
Chapter 7
value, then it is zero speed.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.23
Forward dead zone compensation (%)
0~100
100
P71.24
Reverse dead zone compensation (%)
0~100
100
Parameter Details
P71.23 makes compensation for open and close switching dead zone time of the forward upper
and lower bridge arm, default 100%.
P71.24 makes compensation for open and close switching dead zone time of the reverse upper
and lower bridge arm, default 100%.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.29
PWM modulation selection
0~1
0
PWM modulation mode
0: underflow update
1: overflow/underflow update, carrier frequency below 4k, please set as 1.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.33
Speed precision adjustment (%)
0.0~100.0
100.0
P71.34
Performance improvement compensation
0~1000
106
P71.35
System inertia coefficient (%)
0.0~300.0
100.0
P71.36
Automatic torque lifting at low speed (%)
0.0~300.0
100.0
The above parameters are to set the characteristics of vector control 1 without speed sensor. If
the acceleration and deceleration time are short, increase P71.35 to quicken speed response. If it is
difficult to start, with more low speed torque requirements, please increase P71.36.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.39
Power failure detection threshold (V)
380~550
480
P71.40
KEB bus target voltage (V)
380~550
500
It is set as 480 typically. If fault is sent during KEB, refer to the inverter bus voltage and
160
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
properly increase it.
This value shall be greater than P71.39 (power failure detecton threshlold) and below the
inverter bus voltage during normal power supply. Refer to the inverter bus voltage and properly
increase it.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.41
Power failure treatment mode
0~4
0
0: no treatment;
1: track start (time limit)
2: track start (time unlimited)
3: KEB (with detection undervoltage): start to use KEB, if it exceeds P71.42 (longest power
failure compenstaion time), the bus voltage is still low, then undervoltage fault will be sent.
4: KEB ( no detection undervoltage)
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.42
Longest power failure compenstaion time (s)
0.0~60.0
3.0
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.43
KEB shortest actuation time (ms)
0~2000
100
Chapter 7
If it exceeds P71.42 (longest power failure compenstaion time) after KEB is used, the bus
voltage is still low, then undervoltage fault will be sent.
After KEB is used, P71.43 (KEB shortest actuation time) is required to exit KEB.
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.44
KEB starting frequency reduction (Hz)
0.00~5.00
2.00
To make the motor to be in generating status quickly, set this value within 0-2 times of the
motor rated slip frequency range
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.45
KEB deceleration time (s)
0..00~200.00
10.0
If KEB takes action, increase this value if overvoltage appears, while decrease it if undervoltage
or overcurrent appears.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.46
KEB deceleration mode
0~3
0
It does’t need to set this parameter.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.47
KEB acceleration time (s)
0.00~300.00
25.00
Keep the same as the motor acceleration time set.
Set the following parameters according to the listed value, no alteration.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.48
Proportional Kp of KEB
0.00~300.00
200.00
P71.49
Integral Ki of KEB
0.00~300.00
0.00
P71.50
Differential Kd of KEB
0.00~300.00
0.00
161
Parameter Details
Function code
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.51
KEB upper integral limit (%)
0.0~300.0
100.0
P71.52
KEB lower integral limit (%)
0.0~300.0
100.0
P71.53
KEB closed loop upper output limit (%)
0.0~300.0
100.0
P71.54
KEB closed loop lower output limit (%)
0.0~300.0
100.0
Set as default value without change.
For Kp during KEB, KEB time will be too short if this value is too small, while bus overvoltage
fault may be caused if it is too big.
For Ki during KEB, KEB time will be too short if this value is too small, while bus overvoltage
fault may be caused if it is too big.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.55
KEB upper voltage deviation limit (V)
0.0~500.0
300..0
Chapter 7
When KEB is enabled, deviation between bus voltage and set target voltage is limited not
exceeding P71.55 (KEB upper voltage deviation limit). If it is greater than this value, then it equals
to this value.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.56
KEB voltage zero deviation value (V)
0.0~10.0
0.0
Bus voltage deviation is 0 if it is less than this value.
Parameter Details
Function code
Function Name
Range
Default value
P71.57
Variable carrier frequency threshold
0.0~50.0
0.0
P71.57 variable carrier frequency threshold, output frequency is below this value. If P71.29=0,
carrier frequency drops to 3K; if P71.29=1, carrier frequency drops to 2K to run. If it is set as 0,
indicating the normal carrier operation.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.58
Fan control selection
0~4
0
0: The fan operates when the inverter starts to run; when the inverter stops, the fan will stop 1
min later.
1: The fan operates when the inverter starts to run; when the inverter stops, the fan will stop 5
minutes later.
2: The fan operates when the inverter starts to run; when the inverter stops, the fan will stop 30
minutes later.
3: Fan operation conditions. The fan will operate only if the radiator is greater than 40℃; when
it is below 35℃, the fan will stop after 1s delay.
4: Operate all the time after power on
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P71.62
UP/DOWN single step length
0.0~10.0
0.1
By use of UP/DOWN function, set the variation of each step with this parameter.
162
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
7.11 Group P8X Communication Parameter Groups
7.11.1 Group P80
Communication Selection Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P80.00
Communication mode selection
0~3
0
Select the communication mode applied by the existing inverter, default 0
0: no communication
1: Profibus-DP
2: Modbus
3: CANbus
7.11.2 Group P81
Modbus Communication Parameters
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P81.00
Communication baud rate
0~7
3
P81.01
Data format
0~2
0
P81.02
Transmission mode selection
0~1
1
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P81.04
Local address
1~247
1
P81.04 sets the local address, 0=broadcast address, the available address 1 ~ 247, the reserved
address 248 ~ 255.
Function code
Function name
P81.05
Communication status word set 1
P81.06
Communication status word set 2
Setting range
Factory default
Monitor the communication status word value. See the communication appendix below for
163
Parameter Details
The inverter supports the internationally aceepted Modbus protocol, RTU format. See the
appendix.
P81.00 determines communicaiton baud rate and supports 1200~57600bps.
0: 1200bps
1: 2400bps
2: 4800bps
3: 9600bps
4: 19200bps
5: 38400bps
6: 57600bps
7: 76800bps
P81.01 sets communication format, odd-even check.
0: format 1-8-1, no check.
1: format 1-8-1, even check.
2: format 1-8-1, odd check.
P81.02 sets transmission mode: 0: ASCII; 1: RTU
Chapter 7
Function code
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
composition of the specific status word.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P81.07
Communication address format selection
0~1
1
Select communication address format, 0: hexadecimal number system; 1: decimal number
system.
7.11.3 Group P82
Profibus_DP Communication Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P82.00
Local address
0~255
0
P82.01
Big and little endian mode
0~1
0
Setting range
Factory default
P82.00 indicates the local address
P82.01 sets the big and little endian mode
0: the higher 8 bits will be sent firstly, then the lower 8 bits
1: the lower 8 bits will be sent firstly, then the higher 8 bits
Chapter 7
Function code
Function name
P82.02
Self-defined status word
1
0~59
16
P82.03
Self-defined status word
2
0~59
13
P82.04
Self-defined status word
3
0~59
10
P82.05
Self-defined status word
4
0~59
18
Parameter Details
P82.02 ~ P82.05 set self-defined status:
0: running status 1
1: running status 2
2: detection status
3 ~ 9: spare
10: output torque
11 ~ 12: spare
13: target frequency given
14: current running frequency
15: feedback speed Hz
16: feedback speed rpm
17: spare
18: output voltage effective value
19: output current effective value
20 ~ 21: spare
22: output total power
23: bus voltage
24 ~ 28: spare
29: output terminal status
30: spare
31: input terminal status
32 ~ 33: spare
34: analog input AI0
164
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
35: analog input AI1
36: spare
37: output DA0
38: output DA1
39: spare
40: recent fault No.
41 ~ 42: spare
43: radiator temperature
44 ~ 59: spare
Note: Profibus_DP communication inverter GSD document download address:
Open http://www.stepelectric.com and click “support and download”.
7.12 Group P9X Fault and Display Parameter Groups
7.12.1 Group P90 Language Selection Parameters
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P90.00
Manipulator language selection
0~1
0
P90.00 language selection: 0: Chinese; 1: English;
Chapter 7
Function code
7.12.2 Group P91 LCD Display Parameters
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P91.00
U01 display data
0~34
20
P91.01
U02 display data
0~34
2
P91.02
U03 display data
0~34
3
P91.03
U04 display data
0~34
4
P91.04
U05 display data
0~34
6
P91.05
U06 display data
0~34
16
P91.06
U07 display data
0~34
7
P91.07
U08 display data
0~34
5
P91.08
U01-U08 display section
0~1
0
Display parameters of 8 LCDs are set totally, shown as the following table:
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
0
0 no-definition
1
Output speed rpm
2
Given speed Hz
3
Feedback speed Hz
4
Output current A
5
Output voltage V
6
Output torque %
7
Bus voltage V
8
Spare
9
Spare
10
Spare
11
Count value of phase AB during Z signal
12
Count value of phase AB
13
Angle of phase U
165
Parameter Details
Function code
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
14
Pulses corresponding to CD
15
Encoder position angle
16
Pre-torque %
17
Number of interference of phase Z
18
Number of interference of phase AB
19
Running status
20
Target speed (Hz)
21
Encoder sin central point
22
Encoder cos central point
23
Weighing compensation
24
Given speed (rpm)
25
Speed variation (rpm)
26
Weighing compensation %
27
Encoder phase C central point
28
Encoder phase D central point
29
Radiator temperature
30
Input port status
31
Output port status
32
PID given value
33
PID feedback value
34
Output power
7.12.3 Group P92 LED Display Parameters
Chapter 7
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P92.00
LED display data
0~34
2
See group P91 for its meaning.
7.12.4 Group P93 Running Record Parameters
Parameter Details
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P93.00
Accumulative local power on time (kh)
0.000~65.535
0.000
P93.01
Accumulative local running time (kh)
0.000~65.535
0.000
P93.02
Maximum radiator temperature record (℃)
0.0~100.0
0.0
The inverter will record the following information automatically: accumulative local power on
time, accumulative local running time and maximum radiator temperature record.
Function code
P93.03
Function name
Accumulative output power of the inverter
(kWh)
Setting range
Factory default
0.0~999.9
0.0
The inverter starts to run after power on, accumulative output power in unit time, with the unit
kWh.
Function code
P93.04
Function name
Accumulative output power of the inverter
(MWh)
Setting range
Factory default
0~65535
0
The inverter starts to run after power on, accumulative output power in unit time, with the unit
MWh.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P93.05
Running time of the inverter fan (h)
0~65535
0
Running time of the inverter fan, unit h.
166
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
7.12.5 Group P94 Troubleshooting Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P94.00
Inverter minor fault handling mode
0~3
1
P94.01
Inverter fault automatic reset time (s)
0.0~180.0
10.0
P94.02
Inverter fault automatic reset number
0~100
0
P94.00 sets fault handling mode,
0: when minor fault appears, no fault relay output;
1: when minor fault appears, fault relay output;
2: when 52#PTC fault appears, fault relay output and the inverter stops, no fault automatic reset,
3: 1 and 2 are both valid.
P94.01 sets automatic reset time, default 10s
P94.02 sets number of automatic reset during 30 min, default 0. The default value is not
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P94.03
Radiator overheating time (s)
0.0~180.0
0.5
P94.04
Overspeed protection time (s)
0.00~180.00
1.00
P94.05
Input phase loss voltage threshold
0~150
65
P94.06
Number of short circuit of braking resistor
0~100
10
P94.03 sets the protection time for radiator overheating protection (3# fault). When the radiator
temperature exceeds 80℃, continue P94.03 time protection ;
P94.04 sets the confirm time for overspeed protection (30# fault);
P94.05 sets the judge voltage sag value for input phase loss (29# fault). When input voltage
fluctuation is greater than P94.05, it can be increased in the areas with unstable grid.
P94.06 sets fault confirm number of braking resistor fault (4# fault).
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P94.08
Input phase loss confirm time (s)
0.000~180.000
2.000
P94.09
Relay fault confirm voltage (V)
0~350
90
P94.08 input phase loss confirm time set is detected only during normal running or encoder
dynamic self-learning. Time protection when phase current continuously exceeds P94.08.
P94.09 is relay fault confirm voltage, which is VDC1 when the inverter doesn’t run, and
VDCmax and VDCmin when the inverter runs, detected once every 20ms (VDC1-VDCmax). It is
greater than 94.09 and (VDC1-VDCmax)>(VDCmax-VDCmin)*5, continued for 10 times, protected.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P94.12
IGBT protection number
0~65535
2
Set the number of times that the inverter output current is greater than IGBT protection current
167
Parameter Details
Function code
Chapter 7
automatic reset, automatic reset fault may cause dangerous operation, please use carefully.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
threshold (21# fault).
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
I t protection selection
0~3
0
2
P94.13
Protection selection parameter P94.13 defaults to 0, then I2t protection plays a role. If it is set as 1,
only 45# or 46# protection fault, applying to frequent start or stop. If it is set as 2, only 21# or 27#
protection fault, applying to continuous overload applications. If it is set to 3, no protection for I2t.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P94.14
Analog A0 disconnection value (%)
0.0~100.0
0.0
P94.15
Analog A1 disconnection value (%)
0.0~100.0
0.0
Analog A0/A1 input signal disconnection detection value, relative to 10V percentage. If analog
A0 input voltage < 10V * P94.14/P94.15, analog input disconnects.
Chapter 7
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P94.16
Abnormal analog treatment
0~5
0
If the inverter sends an abnormal analog input fault, set the inverter how to run. P94.16 set value:
0: no action of the inverter;
1: protection shutdown
2: run at the frequency for abnormal analog;
Parameter Details
3: run at the frequency set in P70.00;
4: run at the frequency set in P70.01;
5: run at the frequency set in multi-speed 15.
P94.16=1, no automatic reset for the fault, automatic reset for others.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P94.17
Temperature sampling disconnection treatment
0~1
0
If the inverter sends temperature sampling disconnection fault, how does the inverter run.
P94.17=0, indicating no action for the inverter; 1: protection shutdown.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P94.18
Communication protection
0~1
1
P94.19
Communication disconnection protection time (s)
0.000~65.535
2.000
P94.18 0: not used 1: start communication protection
After the normal communication interruption lasts for P94.19, send 43# fault.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P94.20
Number of grounding protection (times)
0~65535
100
Set confirm times of 32# fault.
168
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
7.12.6 Group P95
Product Identification Parameters
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P95.00
Inverter hardware version
500.04
P95.01
Control board software version
factory
Default not to use functions of the oscilloscope of the upper computer. Set P95.01 as 3728 to start
the oscilloscope. Set P95.01 as 3728 again not to start the oscilloscope; it needs to reset after power
failure and power on once again.
Function code
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P95.02
Version number
100.01
P95.03
Profibus_DP software version
factory
Software and hardware version parameters of the inverter are displayed in group P95, which are
set directly by the manufacturer.
Function name
Setting range
Factory default
P96.00
Inverter rated power (kW)
0.0~999.9
P96.01
Inverter rated current (A)
0.0~999.9
P96.02
Inverter maximum current (A)
0.0~999.9
P96.03
Inverter rated voltage (V)
0~460
380
P96.04
Inverter power factor (%)
0~99
15
P96.05
Inverter sensor current (A)
0~9999
404
P96.06
Inverter module rated current (A)
0~9999
P96.07
Built-in braking unit current (A)
0~9999
P96.08
3-phase current balance coefficient(%)
0.800~1.200
1.000
Fixed parameters of the inverter are displayed in group P96, which are set directly by the
manufacturer:
P96.00 ~ P96.04, initially set by the manufacturer;
P96.05 ~ P96.08, parameter setting of the inverter itself, determined by hardware, read-only.
169
Parameter Details
Function code
Chapter 7
7.12.7 Group P96 Inverter Product Parameters
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 8 Fault Check
This chapter describes inverter faults, fault codes, contents, reasons and their solutions in details,
and provides analysis flow chart for all kinds of faults during motor adjusting or operating.
!Danger
◎ Maintenance operation should start 10 minutes after power supply is
cut off. At that time, charging indicator must be off completely or voltage
of DC bus is lower than 24 VDC.
Or it may cause electric shock.
◎ To retrofit inverter privately is absolutely prohibited.
Or it may cause electric shock or human injury.
◎ Only professional electrician can perform maintenance operation.
Or it may cause fire hazard
Chapter 8
Leaving cable stub or metal obstacle inside inverter is prohibited.
!Caution
power on.
Or it may cause electric shock.
8.1 The Function of Protection and Check
When inverter fault occurs, fault LED on top of digital operator blinks. LED displays the
current fault code.
Inverter has total 39 fault codes. Fault list table 8.1 shows the fault codes and their reasons,
solutions.
171
Fault Check
◎ Don’t change wiring and connect/disconnect terminal blocks during
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Table 8.1 Fault list
Fault
code
Fault display
Possible reason
Solution
Too high voltage at DC
Check network power for fast stop under high inertia
terminal
load, no dynamic braking
Possible short connection to
peripheral circuit
connection, grounding
Losing output phase
Check any loose connection for motor and output
Encoder fault
Module
1
over-current
protection
Check any short circuit between motor and output
Check encoder or its wiring
Hardware poor contact or
Need maintenance by professional technician
damage
Internal component loose
Need maintenance by professional technician
The power circuit
components overheat due to
the cooling fan or cooling
Check the cooling fan. Check whether the cooling fan
power is blocked by dirt or foreign object.
system problem.
Chapter 8
Warning: The inverter must started only after eliminating the malfunction causes,
avoiding the damage to IGBTs
Current sensor damaged
2
ADC fault
Replace current sensor
Problem of current sampling
loop
Fault Check
Reduce ambient temperature, increase ventilation. Keep
Ambient temperature too
the surrounding temperature below 40 ℃ or according
high
to this character to test the capacity of the inverter.
The cooling fan damaged or
3
Heatsink
overheat
Replace control board
foreign object entered into
Check whether the fan power cable is well connected, or
replace the same model fan or remove the foreign
the cooling system.
objects.
Check the cooling fan. Check whether the cooling fan
Cooling fan is abnormal
power is correct and whether there is any foreign object
blocking the fan.
Temperature detect circuit
Need maintenance by professional technician
fault
4
Braking unit
failure
Braking unit damaged
Replace related driving module or control circuit board
External braking resistor
Replace the resistance or the wiring connection
circuit short
5
6
Blown fuse
failure
Over torque
Fuse blown by high current
Too low input voltage
Check the fuse circuit connection, or looseness of
connectors
Check input power supply
172
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Fault
code
Fault display
Possible reason
Solution
output
Motor stop rotating or abrupt
loading change
Encoder failure
Check encoder or its wiring
Missing output phase
Check the loose connection of motor and output wiring
Too short acceleration time
7
Speed deviation
Too high load
protection (in
Increase current limit under allowed range
Abnormal input voltage
Check input power supply
acceleration
Re-rapid starting during
running)
motor in high speed rotating
Too high load rotational
Bus over voltage
8
deceleration
running
Select proper energy consumed braking component
inertia
Too short deceleration time
Too high braking resistance
or no resistor
Bus over voltage
Wait till motor stop rotating, and re-start
Abnormal input power
Extend deceleration time
Connect proper braking resistor
Check input power supply
Too large load rotational
(running at
inertia
constant speed)
Too high braking resistance
Select proper energy consumed braking component
or no resistor
Connect proper braking resistor
Power voltage lower than
minimum equipment working
Check input power supply
voltage
Instantaneous power off
Check input power supply, reset and restart after input
Too high fluctuation of input
9
Bus
undervoltage
Loose power connection
power back to normal
Check input wiring
block
Internal switch power
Need maintenance by professional technician
abnormal
A large starting current load
existing in the same power
Alter power system to conform the specification
supply system
10
Loss of output
Abnormal wiring at inverter
Check wiring at inverter output side based on operation
phase
output, missing or breaking
procedure, eliminate missing, breaking connection
173
Fault Check
protection
power voltage
Chapter 8
protection (in
Extend acceleration time
Reduce load
Too low current limit
Bus over voltage
Prevent motor stopping, reduce abrupt loading change
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Fault
code
Fault display
Possible reason
Solution
connection
Loose output terminal block
Insufficient motor power, less
than 1/20 of maximum
Adjust the capacity of inverter or motor
applicable inverter motor
capacity
Check the motor wiring
Unbalanced three phase
Check the consistency of characteristic of inverter output
output
side and DC side terminals
Low network voltage
Motor over
current at low
speed (during
Chapter 8
acceleration)
Check input power supply
Improper motor parameter
Set proper motor parameters
setting
Rapid start during motor
Restart after motor stop running
running
The acceleration time for
load inertia (GD2) is too
Extend the acceleration time
short.
Low network voltage
Check input power supply
Fault Check
Too large load rotational
11
Motor over
current at low
speed (during
deceleration)
Select proper energy consumed braking component
inertia
Improper motor parameter
Set proper motor parameters
setting
Too short deceleration time
Extend deceleration time
The deceleration time for
load inertia (GD2)
Prolong the slowdown time
is too short
Motor over
Abrupt load change in
current at low
running
speed (during
Improper motor parameter
constant speed)
setting
Reduce frequency and amplitude of abrupt load change
Set proper motor parameters
Incorrect encoder connection
Encoder no signal output
12
Encoder failure
Correct wiring encoder
Check encoder and power supply
Encoder wire disconnected
Abnormal function code
Re-connect
Ensure the proper encoder function code setting
setting
174
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Fault
code
13
Fault display
Possible reason
Current detected
Current keep on flowing
at stopping
while motor stops
Solution
Slip happens by synchronous motor
Need maintenance by professional technician
Reversed speed during
Check the abrupt change of external load
operation
14
Reversed speed
Phase differed between
during operation
encoder and motor
Change motor or phase order
Motor reversed by starting,
current reaches the limit
Synchronous motor over
Over speed in
the same
17
direction (in
maximum
allowed speed)
Check motor
speed by loss of excitation
Wrong angle self-learning for
synchronous motor
Wrong encoder parameter or
interference
Too large positive load or
18
direction (in
allowed speed)
Check motor
speed by loss of excitation
Wrong angle self-learning for
synchronous motor
Wrong encoder parameter or
interference
Too large reversed load or
21
(3 phase
instantaneous
value)
Motor single phase shorted to
earth
Encoder fault
Test loop of drive board fault
Brake detection
Relay triggered, brake not
fault
released
Check the brake power string for loosening or breaks
Tune feedback component
feedback component
23
over-voltage
Replace drive board
Check relay control loop
No signal detected by
Input
Check motor and output circuit
Check encoder and correct wiring
Inactive output relay
22
Check encoder circuit
Check the reason for abrupt load change
abrupt load change
abc over current
Re-do the self-learning
Too high input voltage
Check whether input voltage matches inverter rating
Problem by detection loop of
switch voltage
175
Need maintenance by professional technician
Fault Check
maximum
Check encoder circuit
Chapter 8
Synchronous motor over
opposite
Re-do the self-learning
Check the reason for abrupt load change
abrupt load change
Over speed in
Current limitation is too low or motor unmatched
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Fault
code
Fault display
Possible reason
Solution
Too long time operation
under overload status. The
Stop for a while, if problem occurs again after
larger the load, the shorter the
re-operation, check to ensure the load in allowed range.
time is.
Output over
27
current (valid
Motor blocked
Check motor or brake
Motor coil short
Check motor
value)
Output short
Check wiring or motor
Abnormal voltage at input
side
29
Loss input phase
Check grid voltage
Loss input voltage phase
Input terminal block loose
Chapter 8
30
Check input terminal wiring
Over speed
Wrong encoder parameter set
protection
or interference
(exceed
maximum
Abrupt load change
Fault Check
protected speed
Wrong parameter for over
limit)
speed protection
Check the external reason for abrupt load change
Check parameter
Power grid voltage too low
31
Over current at
motor high speed
Abrupt load in operation
Incorrect motor parameter
Set motor parameter correctly
interference
Wrong wiring
Grounding
protection
Replace motor, to have a grounding isolation test first
Large drain current to earth at
inverter output side
Capacitor aged
Inverter capacitor aged
34
External fault
External fault signal input
35
Unbalance
output
Check encoder circuit
Refer to user manual, correct the wrong wiring
Abnormal motor
33
Check input power supply
Reduce frequency and amplitude of abrupt load change
Wrong encoder parameter or
32
Check encoder circuit
Need maintenance by professional technician
Need maintenance by professional technician
Check the reason for external fault
Abnormal wiring at inverter
output side, missing or
Check inverter output side wiring follow the operation
procedure, eliminate possible missing, broking
broking connection
connection
176
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Fault
code
Fault display
Possible reason
Solution
Motor three phase unbalance
36
37
38
39
40
41
parameter setting
Current sensor
fault
Wrong parameter setting
Modify inverter parameter
Drive board hardware fault
Brake resistor
Connection of external brake
short
resistor short
Too high
Three phase instantaneous
instantaneous
current over and alarm while
current
Ia, Ib and Ic not in operation
KMY detection
fault
Brake switch
detection fault
Need maintenance by professional technician
Check the wiring of brake resistor
Need maintenance by professional technician
KMY detect contactor signal
and KMY control signal
Check the contactor of KMY control and KMY detection
don’t match
Brake switch detect contactor
signal and its control signal
Check brake switch
don’t match
IGBT short
She cause is the same as
circuit protection
Fualt 1.
Check short circuit for motor and output wiring,
grounding
Communication disconnected
43
Communication
No communication data
fault
received within the fixed
Check the communication signal line
1. The input power supply
The input power
changes a lot
supply is
2. Input contactor abnormally
abnormal
connected
1. Check the power supply
2. Check input contactor
3. Temporary electricity
I2t instantaneous
45
over current
protection
I2t valid over
46
Same as fault 21,27
Same as fault 21,27
current
protection
47
Abnormal
analog input
Temperature
48
sampling
disconnection
49
PT detection
Analog input signal
1. Modify the related parameters
disconnected
Abnormal analog input signal
Radiator temperature
2. Check analog input signal
Check connection of temperature sampling
sampling disconnected
PT input signal disconnected
177
Check PT input signal
Fault Check
time
44
Chapter 8
42
Wrong
Check motor
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Fault
code
50
Fault display
Possible reason
fault
Abnormal PT input signal
Humidity fault
Abnormal
51
running output
current
52
Solution
Modify the related parameters
HT input signal disconnected
Abnormal HT input signal
1. Check HT input signal
2. Modify the related parameters
Improper parameter setting
Disconnection between the
inverter and the motor
Check P70.21
Check the connecting line
Ask the professionals to have maintenance
Inverter hardware fault
Motor PTC
Motor continuous overload
overheat
Small motor model
warning
Abnormal PTC
Check the load
Calculate the motor model
Check PTC
8.2 Fault Diagnosis Flow Chart
Because of the reasons of parameter setting, wrong wiring, inverter and motor might not run in
a preset condition at first start. In this case please refer to the introduction in this section about the
Chapter 8
fault diagnosis procedure, to have fault analysis and handling.
Abnormal motor running:

Motor doesn’t run when running command at control terminal block is sent.
Fault Check
178
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
The motor does not
run
N
Charging indicator lit or not
Power breaker and the contactor
on input side are connected or not
Eliminate the fault,
rerun after reset
Connect them
Y
Y
Y
N
Voltage on power input terminals
R, A and T is normal or not
LED fault indicator D4
lit or not
N
Check for voltage,
phase loss or faulty
connection
Y
N
Short circuit chip or DC reactor
available between terminal 1 and 2?
Input forward or reverse
command?
否
Y
N
Connect them
Please contact our
technical department
Y
Terminal X6 and X7
connected correctly?
Y
Replace the faulty
switch or relay
Set frequency?
Reset the speed
Y
N
Correct terminal X2-X4
connection?
Exceed the elevator rated
speed or is it analog input?
N
Y
N
Output voltage present on output
terminal U, V and W of the
inverter?
Please contact our
technical deparment
Y
N
Correct motor wiring?
Y
Please continue to check the following:
1. Check the motor for any fault
2. Whether the brake is released
3. Whether the load is greater than torque limit
set value
4.Whether the motor slip compensation
parameter E10 is set correctly
5. PG encoder specification parameter E09 is
set correctly
179
Correctly connect
the wiring
Replace the faulty
switch or relay
Fault Check
N
Connect correctly
Chapter 8
N
Y
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd

Motor runs but doesn’t have speed change.
The motor runs but
without speed
change
The motor rated speed is too
low?
Y
Increase the set
value
N
The encoder is correctly
wired?
N
Correct connection
Y
Speed given is multi-speed signal
or analog signal
Analog signal
Analog signal (0-10V or 420mA), change or not
Y
N
Multi-speed
signal
Chapter 8
Terminals X2-X4 are
correctly wired?
Terminal AI0, AI1 or AI2 is
correctly wired?
N
否
Correct connection
Y
Fault Check
Each section is different for
multi-speed setting?
N
Reset the speed of
each section
N
Please contact with
our technical
division
Y
Acceleration and deceleration
time is too long?
Y
Reduce the acceleration and
deceleration time according
to load
180
Y
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Chapter 9 Service and Maintenance
This chapter introduces the general information about service and maintenance.
Table 9.1 The danger notice for service and maintenance
!Danger
◎ Maintenance should be started 10 minutes after power off. The charge indicator
should be fully off and DC bus voltage should be below 24 VDC.
Or it may cause electric shock.
◎ Never remould inverter unauthorizedly.
Or it may cause electric shock and human injury
◎ Only professional electrician can operate the product maintenance. Never leave
any wire stubs, metal pieces inside the inverter.
Or it may cause fire hazard.
Table 9.2 The caution notice for service and maintenance
!Caution
Or it may cause electric shock
Our company provides warranty service if inverter (main body) has the following situation:
Our company will be responsible for the repairs within the warranty period (counted date from
leaving factory) if inverter has failure or damage in normal operation condition. An appropriate
maintenance cost will be charged if the warranty period is due.
If the failure was caused by following reasons, a certain cost will occur even within warranty
period:
1) Problem caused by not follow up instruction manual or unauthorized repair or alter
2) Problem caused by over specified limit usage
3) Drop the product or transport damage
4) Damage caused by earthquake, fire hazard, flood, lighting, abnormal voltage or other natural
disasters, or its affiliate reason
181
Service and Maintenance
9.1 Warranty
Chapter 9
◎ Do not alter wiring and remove wiring terminal while power is on.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
9.2 Product Inquiry
If product damages, has fault or other problem, please contact to our office or customer service
department and prepare the following information:
Inverter Model
Serial number
Date of purchase
Information needs to be provided: damage description, unclear question and fault
occurred
9.3 Routine Check
Inverter hull can’t be taken off during energizing or operation. To observe the state of operation
can only go through visual check. The following items can be routinely checked:
1) Does ambient environment fulfill standard specification?
2) Does operation conform to the standard specification?
3) Any abnormal noise, vibration or others?
Chapter 9
4) Proper working cooling fan installed in inverter?
5) Any over-heat situation?
9.4 Periodic Check
Service and Maintenance
To start a periodic check, inverter should stop operating, switch off power, then remove the hull.
The charging capacitor in main circuit may still have charged voltage and needs time to discharge it.
Therefore the check operation can only start after charging indicator is off and DC bus voltage
measured by multimeter is lower than safety value (below 24VDC).
There will be an electric shock hazard if you touch the terminal block right after power off.
Table 9.3 lists the items needed to be periodic check.
182
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Table 9.3 Periodic check item
Area
Item
Method
Judgment
1) Ambient temperature
Operation environment
1) Ensure ambient temperature, humidity,
1) Visual check,
lower than 40℃.
vibration, check any dust, corrosive gas, oil mist
thermometer,
Humidity and other
or water drop, etc
hydrometer
environment index meet
2) Any dangerous goods in surrounding area
2) Visual Check
the requirements
2) No dangerous good
LCD display
Connector
Terminal block, bolt
Wire
2) Any missing letter in screen?
Visual check
1) Normal condition
2) Loosening connector
2) Visual check
2) Secured installation
Visual check
Normal condition
1) Shielded layer broken or faded
2) Deformed copper connector
contactor, relay 2) Is contact point proper closed
check
Heatsink
1) No
2) Can hear contactor
closing
1) Any leaking, color change, crack and swollen
enclosure
Visual check
Normal condition
Visual check
Normal condition
2) Does safety valve go out? Any swollen on it?
1) Is dust piled up?
2) Air duct blocked or attached by foreign object
1) Hearing, visual
check. Manual turn fan
1) Any abnormal noise
2) Any abnormal vibration
3) Color changed due to overheat
blade after power off.
1) Rotating smoothly
2) Visual check
2), 3) no abnormalities
3) Visual check,
olfaction check
Connection
Control
component
circuit
Control board
Any dust or attached foreign object on two row
terminal strip between control board and main
Visual check
Normal condition
circuit
1) Any color change or odor smell on control PCB
2) Any crack, damage, deform on PCB
183
1) Visual Check,
olfaction check
2) Visual check
Normal condition
Service and Maintenance
Cooling fan
Chapter 9
circuit
2) Correct display
1) Tightening
Hearing check, visual
capacitor
1) Even backlight
1) Loosening bolt
Electromagnetic 1) Has vibration sound in operation
Charging
Main
1) Is LCD clearly displayed? Even backlight?
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Appendix A Inverter EMC Installation Guide
This appendix introduces EMC inverter design, installation from aspects of noise suppression,
wiring requirement, grounding, peripheral equipment surge absorption, current leakage, install area
dividing, installation precaution, using power filter, and radiation noise treatment.
A.1 Noise Suppression
The principle of inverter decides that a certain noise may produce. The effect to the peripheral
equipments depends on the type of noise, noise transmission path, design and installation of kinetic
system, wiring and grounding.
A.1.1 Types of Noise
Types of noise see Fig. A.1.
Types of noise
Electrostatic
induction noise
Power line
transmission
noise
Path②
Path③
Path⑦⑧
Fig. A.1 Diagram for noise type
A.1.2 Noise Transmission Route
Noise transmission path see Fig. A.2.
185
Motor line
radiation
noise
Power line
Radiation
noise
Inverter
Radiation
noise
Path④
Path⑤
Path⑥
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
Leakage current
grounding wire
circuit noise
Space
transmision noise
EMC noise
Appendix A
Path①
Circuit
transmission noise
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Telephone
Sensor power
supply
Control
instrument
Radio device
Inverter
Sensor
Motor
Fig. A.2 Noise transmission route
A.1.3 Basic Method for Noise Suppression
Appendix A
Basic methods against noise suppression see Table A.1.
Table A.1 Basic countermeasure for noise suppression
N
Cause
o.
①
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
⑦
⑧
If signal cable runs in parallel with power cable
or they are bundled, noise will be transmitted in
signal cable due to the electromagnetic
induction and static induction. Peripheral device
may be wrongly triggered.
Countermeasure
1) Avoid signal cable and power cable in parallel running, or bundled;
2) Keep susceptible peripheral device far away from inverter;
3) Lay easy affected signal cable far away from inverter input/output power
cable;
4) Use shielded wire for signal cable and power cable. It is better to insert
into metal tube separately (minimum 20 cm between metal tubes)
If the peripheral device becomes a close loop
②
circuit by wiring to inverter, the inverter
Don’t ground the peripheral device can avoid the wrong action caused by
grounding current leakage will cause wrong
current leakage
action of the peripheral device.
If the peripheral device shares the same power
③
supply with inverter, noise created by inverter
can be transmitted alone the power cable. The
peripheral devices linked in the system may
Install a noise filter at inverter input side, or use isolate transformer/power
filter to other peripheral devices for noise isolation
cause wrong action.
186
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
1) Easy affected peripheral devices and their cable should be installed far
away from inverter. Shielded cable should be used for signal cable and
shielded layer grounds to the earth. Signal cable inserts into metal tube and
away from inverter and its input/output power cable. A perpendicular cross
④
⑤
⑥
If weak current peripheral devices, such as
must be wired in case of inevitable cable crossing between signal cable and
control computer, gauges, radio device, sensor
power cable.
and their cable are installed in the same cabinet
2) To install radio noise filter or linear noise filter (Ferrite Common Mode
with inverter, and their wiring is closed to the
Choke) on both input and output side of inverter can suppress radiated
inverter, radiate interference may cause wrong
noise of inverter input and output power cable.
action.
3) Cable from inverter to motor should be inserted into a thick shield of
2mm or thicker, or be buried in a cement groove. Cable should be inserted
into a metal tube and its shield should be grounded (4 core cable can be
taken for motor wiring, one core grounds to earth at inverter side and
connects to the motor enclosure at the other end).
A.2 Wiring Requirement
A.2.1 Requirement for Cable Laying
In order to avoid mutual coupling of interference, control signal cable should be laid separately
from power cable and as far as possible from them. Fig. A.3(a) shows this situation. Fig. A.3(b) shows
that a perpendicular cross must be ensured when a signal cable must pass a power cable of power
Appendix A
supply or motor.
Motor cable
Power cable
Control signal cable
Control signal cable
(b) Orthogonal cross laying
(a) Parallel laying
Fig. A.3 Wiring requirement
A.2.2 Requirement for Cable Cross Section Area
The larger the cable cross section is, the larger the earth capacitance, and the higher the ground
current leakage will be. If the cross section of motor power cable is too large, motor should be used
with decreased rating and reduces the output current (reduce 5% of current for each increasing level of
187
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
Power or motor cable
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
cross section).
A.2.3 Requirement for Shielded Cable
High frequency, low impedance, shielded armor cable, such as copper mesh, aluminum mesh,
should be used.
A.2.4 Installation Requirement for Shielded Cable
Normally control cable should be a shielded cable, and shielded metal mesh should be connected
to metal cabinet by 360° ring type clamp fixed. Fig. A.4 shows the correct connection. Shielded
connection shown in Fig. A.5 is wrong.
Fig. A.4 Correct shielded grounding
Fig. A.5 Incorrect shielded grounding
A.3 Grounding
A.3.1 Type of Grounding
Appendix A
Fig. A.6 lists the methods for electrode to ground.
Inverter
变频器
Other
equipment
其它设备
PE
Other
其它设备
equipment
PE
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
(a) Special
ground electrode (the best)
(a)专用接地极(最好)
Inverter
变频器
Inverter
变频器
Other
其它设备
equipment
PE
(b) Common
ground electrode (acceptable)
(b)共用接地极(可以)
Inverter
变频器
Other
其它设备
equipment
PE
(c) Common
ground electrode (unacceptable)
(c)共用接地极(不好)
(d) Common
ground electrode (unacceptable)
(d)共用接地极(不好)
Fig. A.6 Diagram for special grounding
Mathod (a) is the best grounding method in above 4 connections. It is strongly suggested for users
to adopt this grounding method.
188
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
A.3.2 Precaution for Ground Wiring
1) Grounding cable must be selected to have a standard cross section in order to minimize the
grounding impedance. Flat cable has less high-frequency impedance than round conductor cable, flat
cable is better in this case if they have the same cross section area.
2) To have grounding cable as short as possible, and grounding spot should be connected to
inverter as close as possible.
3) If motor takes 4-core cable, one core must be grounded at inverter side. Other end is connected
to the motor grounding terminal. The best grounding solution is that both motor and inverter have their
individual ground electrode.
4) If all grounding terminals of different parts in control system are connected together, noise
may be created because of ground current leakage. It may affect the peripheral devices other than
inverter. In the same control system, grounding for inverter and other weak current devices, such as
computer, sensor or audio device, should be wired separately.
5) In order to acquire low high-frequency impedance, all equipment fix bolts can be taken as
high-frequency terminal to connect the cabinet back panel. Be aware to remove insulating paint before
installation.
6) Grounding cable should be laid away from the I/O wiring of noise sensitive device, and should
keep short.
Relays, contactors and electromagnetic brakes can create large amount of noise. Surge absorber
needs to be installed even those components aren’t inside the inverter case. Wiring is shown in Fig.
Appendix A
A.4 Surge Absorber Installation
A.7.
220VAC
Diode
二极管
Inverters
变频器
+24VDC
Filters
RC-滤波器
220VAC
Fig. A.7 Requirement for relay, contactor, EM brake
189
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
Pressure sensitive resistors
压敏电阻器
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
A.5 Leakage Current and Its Solution
Leakage current flows through the linear capacitor and motor capacitor at input/output side of
inverter. Current as shown in Fig. A.8, includes ground leakage current and interline leakage current.
The amount of leakage current is decided by the size of carrier frequency and capacitance.
MCCB
Inter-line
distributed capacitors
线间分布电容
R
Input power
输入
supply
电源 S
Inverter
变频器
Motor
电机
T
Capacitor ground
电容对地
分布电容
Cable ground
distributed
电缆对地
capacitors
分布电容
distributed capacitors
Fig. A.8 Leakage current path
A.5.1 Ground Leakage Current
Besides inverter, ground leakage current can also flow into other devices by grounding cable. It
might trigger the wrong action of leakage current breaker, relay or other devices. The higher the
inverter carrier frequency, the longer the motor cable is, the higher the leakage current will be.
Appendix A
Suppression measure: lower carrier frequency; short motor cable, take special designed leakage
breaker for ultraharmonics/surge.
A5.2 Cable Inter-line Leaking
The leakage current flowed through distributed interline capacitors at inverter output side, may
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
trigger the wrong action of external thermal relay due to its ultraharmonics. Especially for small
inverter which capacity is below 7.5 KW, the long cable (more than 50m) causes increasing leakage
current. External thermal relay is easy wrongly triggered.
Suppression measure: lower carrier frequency; install AC output reactor at output side;
recommend to use temperature sensor and monitor the motor temperature directly, or to use electronic
thermal relay for motor overload protect carried by inverter to replace external thermal relay.
A.6 Radiation Suppression
Normally inverter is installed in a metal cabinet. Only minor radiation may affect the devices
outside the metal cabinet. The main radiation source is the power cable connected externally. Since all
inverter power cable, motor cable, control cable and keyboard wire need to be wired to outside of
shielded cabinet, the outgoing position should be special handled, or shield will be invalid.
190
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
In Fig. A.9, part of cable inside the shielded cabinet plays as antenna. It picks up noise radiation
in the cabinet and transmits to the outside air via cable. In Fig. A.10, wiring cable shielded layer to
cabinet grounding at the outlet, noise radiation picked up in the cabinet will then flow into the earth
directly via shielded cabinet, and will not affect the environment.
By using shielded layer grounding introduced in Fig. A.10, the place where cable shielded layer
connects to the grounding cabinet should be close to the cable outlet, otherwise the unshielded cable
between grounding point and outlet will still be functioned as antenna and have coupling affection.
The distance between grounding point and outlet should be less than 15cm, the short, the better.
Cable
Shielded cabinet
Cable
Shielded cabinet
Fig. A.10 Cable shielded layer connects to shielded cabinet and suppress the radiation
191
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
Cable shielded layer
Connects the
cabinet case at the
outlet
Appendix A
Fig. A.9 Radiation brought by cables from shielded cabinet
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
A.7 Power Cable Filter Guide
Devices which create strong interference or are sensitive to surrounding interference can use
power cable filter.
A.7.1 Function of Power Cable Filter
1) Power cable filter is a dual low-pass filter, it allows only DC and current with 50Hz. High
frequency electromagnetic interference current is not allowed to pass. It can not only suppress
electromagnetic interference created by device itself into the power cable, but also prevent
interference on power cable into the device.
2) Power cable filter can meet both criterion for conduct emission and conduct susceptibility
EMC. It can suppress the radiation interference at the same time.
A.7.2 Precaution for Power Cable Filter Installation
1) In cabinet, filter should be installed to the inlet of power cable as close as possible. The filter
power cable inside the cabinet should keep short.
2) If filter input and output cable are laid to close, high frequency interference will bypass the
filter and start to couple directly. Power cable filter will lose the function.
3) Normally, there is a designated grounding terminal on filter enclosure. If only one conductor is
Appendix A
used to connect filter grounding terminal to the cabinet, filter will not be properly functional due to the
high frequency impedance of long conductor. The correct way is to attach the filter enclosure to the
metal conductive surface of cabinet and possible keep the large contact area. Note to remove
insulating paint, ensure good electrical contact.
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
A.8 Installation Section Divide for EMC Inverter
In the driving system consist of inverter and motor, inverter and the peripheral devices, such as
controller, sensors, are normally installed in the same cabinet. Control cabinet can suppress the outside
interference by taking measures at the main conjunction. Therefore radio noise filter and input cable
AC reactor should be installed at input cable terminal in control cabinet. To meet the EMC
requirement, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) should also be fulfilled inside the cabinet.
In the driving system consist of inverter and motor, inverter, brake unit and contactors are all
sources of high noise intensity. It will affect the noise sensitive peripheral devices, such as automation
equipments, encoder and sensors. Based on their electrical characteristics they can be installed in
different EMC zones. The most effective measure to reduce interference is to separate the noise source
and noise receiver in space. Fig. A.11 shows the division of inverter EMC installation zone.
192
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
主电源线
Main
power line
V
Ⅴarea
Area
电气柜cabinet
Electrical
Incoming line
进线滤波器
filter
ⅠArea
Ⅲ Area
Control device
控制装置and
(computers
etc.)
(计算机等)
Incoming line
进线电抗器
reactor
Inverter
变频器
Production
machinery
生产机械
ⅡArea
Sensors (temperature,
传感器(温度、
liquid
level and etc.)
液位等)
Mechanical
机械系统
system
Motor
电机
Linear noise
线形噪声
filter
滤波器 ⅣArea
Ⅵ Area
Grounding diaphgram
接地隔板
Motor cables
电机电缆
Test signal line
检测信号线
Above installation zones are described as follows:
Zone I: control power transformer, control device, sensors and etc.
Zone II: control signal cables and their connection, require certain ability for anti-interference
Appendix A
Fig. A.11 Diagram for inverter EMC installation zone
Zone III: major noise source includes incoming cable reactor, inverter, brake unit, contactors etc.
Zone V: Power supply (include wiring of radio noise filter)
Zone VI: Motor and its cable
Each zone must be separated and keep a minimum 20cm distance to avoid electromagnetic
coupling. The grounded separator is the best to divide each zone for coupling. Cables in different
zones should be inserted into individual cable ducts. When filter is required, it should be installed at
entrance point of each zone. All bus cables (such as RS485) and signal cables from cabinet must be
shielded.
193
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
Zone IV: Output noise filter and its wiring
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
A.9 Precaution for Electrical Installation
Fig. A.12 shows the inverter electrical installation.
Main power line
>20cm
Isolation
transformers
Power line of
inverters
>30cm
Filters
Air breakers
Power cables of
other equipment
Metallic
cabinet
Other
electronic
equipment
Metallic
cabinet
AC input reactor
Inverters
Motor
cables
Control
cables
>50cm
AC output
reactors
Appendix A
Motors
Fig. A.12 Inverter electrical installation diagram
To satisfy requirement of EMC, please note during installation:
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
1) Inverter should be installed inside the cabinet. Enclosure of devices, such as inverter back
panel, input filter enclosure, all must be installed on the back of control cabinet firmly, and ensure
having good electrical contact between them; to minimize the space between inverter and filter, a
space less than 15cm can maximum reduce the grounding cable high frequency impedance between
inverter and input filter, reduce high frequency noise.
2) At entrance of control cabinet (not more than 5 cm from the outlet) installs a wide grounding
block. To ensure a good electrical contact, all input, output cable shielded layers should be connected
to the grounding block and fixed by 360° ring type clamp.
3) Motor cable must use shielded cable, and the best to have metal interlocked conduit, or double
layers of metal mesh shielded cable. The 360° ring type clamp (such as Fig. A.4) must be used as metal
cable clamp to fix the shielded layer of motor cable at inverter side to the back board of cabinet. There
are two fixing locations: one is to close the inverter (the best is less than 15 cm), other location is to fix
194
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
it on the ground block. 360° ring type connection should be taken to connect the motor metallic case
when shielded layer of motor cable goes through the motor terminal box at motor side. If this type of
connection is hard to do, the shielded layer can be braided, stretched and connected to the motor
ground terminal. The stretched width should be greater than 1/5 of the braid length. The length of
motor cable core and cable from PE flexible pipe should be as short as possible. The best is to keep it
less than 5 cm.
4) Shielded cable must be taken for terminal block control cable. Its shielded layer should be
connected to the ground block at the cabinet entrance and taken 360° ring type metal clamp. At
inverter side shielded layer can be fixed on inverter metal case by using metal cable clamp. If that way
is difficult to use, the shielded layer can be woven to a broad and short braid, and connect to the PE
terminals after stretched. The best length of cable core and cable from PE flexible pipe should keep
less than 15 cm.
5) Keyboard cable can’t go out of the shielded cabinet.
6) The holes or seams on shielded cabinet should keep small and not more than 15cm.
A.10 EMC Standard Fulfilled by AS180 Series High-Performance
Inverter
AS180 series high performance vector inverter can meet the EMC standard as shown in Table
proper type of filter and reactor) and following above mentioned wiring precautions.
Table A.2 AS180 series High-Performance inverter EMC performance summary
Item
emission
Radiated harassment
emission
Electrostatic discharge
Level of satisfying criteria
0.15≤f<0.50MHz, 100dB(μv/m) ——Quasi-peak valu
EN12015.1998
0.50≤f<5.0MHz, 86dB(μv/m) ——Quasi-peak valu
5.0≤f<30MHz, 90~70dB(μv/m) ——Quasi-peak valu
EN12015.1998
30≤f<230MHz, 40dB(μv/m) ——Quasi-peak valu
230≤f<1000MHz, 47dB(μv/m) ——Quasi-peak valu
EN12016.2004
Criteria B (contact discharge 4000V, air discharge 8000V)
EN12016.2004
Level 3
EN12016.2004
Level 4 Criteria B (heavy current end ±2KV/2.5kHz)
Surge immunity
EN12016.2004
Criteria B(±1KV)
Conducted immunity
EN12016.2004
Criteria A(3V,0.15~80MHz)
immunity
Radiated electromagnetic
field immunity
Electrical Fast Transient
(EFT) Immunity
195
Criteria A(3V/m)
Inverter EMC Installation Guide
Conducted harassment
Criteria
Appendix A
A.2 after installing proper I/O filter, AC reactor (refer to the ACCESSORIES SELECTION for the
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Appendix B Standard Compatibility
(1) European Low Voltage Directive
AS180 series inverter complies with the standard of EN61800-5-1:2007, and its clause of Low
Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
This inverter complies also the following standard:
EN61800-5-1:2007: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems –Part 5-1: Safety
requirements-Electrical, thermal and energy.
(2) European EMC Regulations
AS180 series inverter meets the following EMC standards once you start to install the product
according the recommendation provided by this handbook.
EN12015.1998 Electromagnetic compatibility-Product family standard for lifts, escalators
and passenger conveyors-Emission.
EN12016.2004 Electromagnetic compatibility-Product family standard for lifts, escalators
and passenger conveyors-Immunity.
EN61800-3:2004: Power Drive Category D3.
Appendix B
(3) ISO9001 Quality Management System
standard of ISO9001.
197
Standard Compatibility
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd executes the quality management according the
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Appendix C Modbus Communication Protocol
The inverter whose Modbus address is set as hexademical number system:
Modbus address of register = register address + 0x999A
Modbus address of register bit = register address*16 + bit No. n (n=0… 15)
Modbus address of inverter parameter = parameter No. expressed in hexademical (for example,
Modbus address of P10.23: 0x1023)
The inverter whose Modbus address is set as decimal number system:
Modbus address of register = register address + 10000
Modbus address of register bit = register address*16 + bit No. n (n=0… 15)
Modbus address of inverter parameter = parameter No. expressed in demical (for example,
Modbus address of P10.23: 1023)
C.1 Command Data [registers 3 and 6] [bits 1 and 5]
Read the register in this table with function code 3, write the register in this table with function
code 6
Read the bit in this table with function code 1, write the bit in this table with function code 5
Register address
Contents
Communication control word
bit0 1: FWD 0: invalid
bit1 1: REV 0: invalid
bit2 1: run 0: stop
bit3 reserved (1: with external fault)
0000H
bit7~5 reserved (multi-speed selection # attached table Z-1)
bit8 reserved (1: valid inching frequency #)
bit10~9 acceleration and deceleration time selection 0: curve 1 1: curve 2
Appendix C
bit4 1: reset fault command
bit11 reserved (1: lockout base #)
bit12 1: select running and given command 2 0: select running and given command 1
bit15~14 not used*
0001H
0002H
0003H
0004H
Modbus target frequency given value, communication given value
0~30000: 0.00~300.00Hz
Reserved (Modbus current frequency given value)
IQ10(1.0): rated frequency
Reserved (Modbus PID given value)
10000 corresponds to 100% given quantity
Reserved (Modbus PID target value validity 1: valid 0: invalid)
199
Modbus Communication Protocol
bit13 1: select PID parameter group 2 0: select PID parameter group 1
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
0005H
0006H
Reserved (AO1 output value)
-1024~1024: -5.00~5.00V
Reserved (AO2 output value)
-1024~1024: -5.00~5.00V
Multifunctional port output#
bit0 1: DO0 (relay A) ON 0: OFF
bit1 1: DO1 (relay B) ON 0: OFF
bit2 1: DO2 ON 0: OFF
bit3 1: DO3 ON 0: OFF
0007H
bit4 1: DO4 (OC) ON 0: OFF
bit5 1: DO5 (OC) ON 0: OFF
bit6 not used
bit7 not used
bit15~8 not used
# actual terminal output value = Modbus set value | internal output value of function
terminal
Reserved (validity of Modbus broadcast data)
bit0 1: valid Modbus broadcast given of terminal DI0 0: invalid
bit1 1: valid Modbus broadcast given of terminal DI1 0: invalid
bit2 1: valid Modbus broadcast given of terminal DI2 0: invalid
bit3 1: valid Modbus broadcast given of terminal DI3 0: invalid
bit4 1: valid Modbus broadcast given of terminal DI4 0: invalid
bit5 1: valid Modbus broadcast given of terminal DI5 0: invalid
0008H
bit6 1: valid Modbus broadcast given of terminal DI6 0: invalid
bit7 1: valid Modbus broadcast given of terminal DI7 0: invalid
bit8 not used
bit9 not used
bit10 1: valid target frequency broadcast given value 0: invalid
bit11 1: valid current frequency broadcast given value 0: invalid
Appendix C
bit12 1: valid running command broadcast given value (FWR, REV, start, stop)
bit15~13 not used
0009H
Reserved (target frequency broadcast given value)
000AH
Reserved (current frequency broadcast given value)
Reserved (running signal broadcast given value)
bit0 Modbus broadcast given value # of terminal DI0 (the corresponding specific function is
Modbus Communication Protocol
set by the parameter )
bit1 Modbus broadcast given value # of terminal DI1 (the corresponding specific function is
set by the parameter)
000BH
bit2 Modbus broadcast given value # of terminal DI2 (the corresponding specific function is
set by the parameter)
bit3 Modbus broadcast given value # of terminal DI3 (the corresponding specific function is
set by the parameter)
bit4 Modbus broadcast given value # of terminal DI4 (the corresponding specific function is
set by the parameter)
200
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
bit5 Modbus broadcast given value # of terminal DI5 (the corresponding specific function is
set by the parameter)
bit6 Modbus broadcast given value # of terminal DI6 (the corresponding specific function is
set by the parameter)
bit7 Modbus broadcast given value # of terminal DI7 (the corresponding specific function is
set by the parameter)
bit8 not used
bit9 not used
bit10 1: FWD 0: invalid
bit11 1: REV 0: invalid
bit12 1: run 0: stop
bit13 1: external fault
bit14 1: reset fault command
bit15 not used
# adopted value of the function input terminal = (Modbus broadcast value & broadcast given
validity | actual input value of function terminal
000CH~0018H
Reserved (broadcast data)
Virtual input terminals
bit0: virtual terminal X0
bit1: virtual terminal X1
bit2: virtual terminal X2
bit3: virtual terminal X3
0019H
bit4: virtual terminal X4
bit5: virtual terminal X5
bit6: virtual terminal X6
bit7: virtual terminal X7
bit8~15: reserved
#actual terminal input value = Modbus set value | input value of outer terminal
Reserved control word (79 spaces)
001AH: communication given torque -1000~1000  -100.0%~100.0% motor rated torque
001BH: speed limit value 0~40000  0.00~400.00Hz
Parameter update request
After the parameter is received from the inverter via Modbus, it is saved in its parameter
Appendix C
001AH~0068H
image area.
0069H
0x55: update the actual parameter in RAM by use of that in image area.
0: no update.
[Note]: the unit is automatically cleared after every update.
006AH~01F9H
Reserved (parameter)
01FAH~046FH
Reserved 630 spaces
201
Modbus Communication Protocol
0xAA: update the actual parameter in RAM by use of the default factory parameter.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
C.2 Monitoring Data [register 4] [bit 2]
Read the register in this table with function code 4 and read the bit in this table with function code
2.
Register address
Contents
Status word of the inverter status
bit0 1: with running signal 0: no running signal
bit1 1: in service
bit2 1: in zero speed
bit3 1: in forward 0: in reverse
bit4 1: normal power-on of the inverter 0: abnormal power-on of the inverter
0470H
bit5 1: in lockout base
bit6 not used
bit7 1: in fault
bit8 reserved (1: in fault retry)
bit9 reserved (1: wrong parameter setting)
bit10 1: in self-tuning
bit11 1: request self-tuning
bit15~12 not used
Detection status
bit0 1: frequency detection LF, frequency ≤ detection frequency
bit1 1: frequency detection GF, frequency ≥ detection frequency
bit2 1: frequency detection EF, given and feedback frequency in detection frequency band
bit3 1: speed arrive
0471H
bit4 reserved (1: in analog signal given frequency command loss)
bit5 1: in over-torque detection
bit6 1: in undervoltage detection
bit7 1: bus voltage greater than 85% rated voltage
Appendix C
bit8 1: exceeding 5% rated current during running, exceeding 10% rated current during stop
bit9 1: fault forecast
bit15~10 not used
0472H
0473H
Reserved (given target frequency)
Current running frequency
5000 corresponding to 50.00Hz
Modbus Communication Protocol
0474H
Reserved (PID given value)
0475H
Reserved (PID feedback value)
0476H
Reserved (PID output value)
0477H
Reserved (PID proportional item)
0478H
Reserved (PID integral item)
0479H
Reserved (PID differential item)
047AH
Reserved (communication fault)
bit0 1: communication overtime
202
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
bit1 1: frame format
bit2 1: CRC error
bit3 1: data length error
bit4 1: odd-even check error
bit5 1: overload error
bit6 1: illegal command
bit7 reserved (manipulator communication fault)
bit15~8 not used
Parameter updating status
bit0 1: in updating 0: update completed
047BH
bit1 reserved (1: data exceeding limit)
bit2 reserved (1: data mismatched)
bit3~15 not used
047CH~0484H
Not used (9 units)
Inverter output monitoring 1
bit0 1: normal power-on 0: abnormal power-on
bit1 1: fault 0: normal
bit2 1: running signal 0: no running signal
bit3 1: frequency/speed arrive signal
bit4 1: consistent frequency/speed
0485H
bit5 1: in zero speed
bit6 1: DC bus voltage greater than 85% rated voltage
bit7 1: exceeding 5% rated current during running, exceeding 10% rated current during stop
bit8 1: in self-tuning
bit9
1: speed detection 1
bit10 1: speed detection 2
bit11 1: fault forecast
bit12 1: self-tuning request
Reserved (inverter output monitoring 2)
0487H
Reserved (inverter output monitoring 3)
0488H
Reserved (inverter output monitoring 4)
Water pump output monitoring 1
bit0 1: water pump sleep
Appendix C
0486H
bit1 1: motor 1 start
bit2 1: motor 2 start
bit4 1: motor 4 start
0489H
bit5 1: motor 5 start
bit6 1: motor 6 start
bit7 reserved (Y8)
bit8 reserved (Y9)
bit9 reserved (Y10)
bit10 reserved (Y11)
bit11 reserved (Y12)
203
Modbus Communication Protocol
bit3 1: motor 3 start
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
bit12 reserved (Y13)
bit13 reserved (Y14)
bit14 reserved (Y15)
bit15 reserved (Y16)
Water pump output monitoring 2
bit0 reserved (Y17)
bit1 reserved (Y18)
bit2 reserved (Y19)
bit3 reserved (Y20)
bit4 reserved (Y21)
bit5 reserved (Y22)
bit6 reserved (Y23)
048AH
bit7 reserved (Y24)
bit8 reserved (Y25)
bit9 reserved (Y26)
bit10 reserved (Y27)
bit11 reserved (Y28)
bit12 reserved (Y29)
bit13 reserved (Y30)
bit14 reserved (Y31)
bit15 reserved (Y32)
Fault indication 1
bit0 module overcurrent protection
bit1 ADC fault
bit2 radiator overheat
bit3 braking unit failure
bit4 reserved
bit5 reserved
bit6 speed variation
Appendix C
048BH
bit7 bus overvoltage
bit8 bus undervoltage
bit9 output phase loss
bit10 motor low speed overcurrent
bit11 encoder fault
bit12 reserved
Modbus Communication Protocol
bit13 reserved
bit14 reserved
bit15 motor phase sequence error
Fault indication 2
bit0 overspeed in the same direction
048CH
bit1 overspeed in the opposite direction
bit2 reserved
bit3 encoder communication fault
bit4 abc overcurrent
204
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
bit5 brake detection fault
bit6 input overvoltage
bit7 reserved
bit8 reserved
bit9 no self-learning of the encoder
bit10 output overcurrent
bit11 SINCOS encoder fault
bit12 input phase loss
bit13 overspeed protection
bit14 motor high speed overcurrent
bit15 grounding protection
Fault indication 3
bit0 capacitor ageing
bit1 external fault
bit2 reserved
bit3 reserved
bit4 current sensor fault
bit5 braking resistor short circuit
bit6 too large instantaneous current value
048DH
bit7 output contactor fault
bit8 brake switch fault
bit9 IGBT short circuit protection
bit10 communication fault
bit11 abnormal input power
bit12 reserved
bit13 reserved
bit14 reserved
bit15 reserved
Reserved (fault indication 4)
bit15~0 reserved
Multifunctional terminal input status
bit0 1: multifunctional terminal X0 ON 0: OFF
bit1 1: multifunctional terminal X1 ON 0: OFF
Appendix C
048EH
bit2 1: multifunctional terminal X2 ON 0: OFF
bit3 1: multifunctional terminal X3 ON 0: OFF
bit4 1: multifunctional terminal X4 ON 0: OFF
bit5 1: multifunctional terminal X5 ON 0: OFF
bit6 1: multifunctional terminal X6 ON 0: OFF
bit7 1: multifunctional terminal X7 ON 0: OFF
bit8 not used
bit9 not used
bit15~10 not used
0490H
Multifunctional terminal output status
bit0 1: K1 ON 0: OFF
205
Modbus Communication Protocol
048FH
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
bit1 1: K2 ON 0: OFF
bit2 1: Y0 ON 0: OFF
bit3 1: Y1 ON 0: OFF
bit4 1: Y3 (K3) ON 0: OFF
bit5 1: Y4 (K4) ON 0: OFF
bit6 not used
bit7 not used
bit15~8 not used
Appendix C
0491H
Feedback speed (Hz) -30000~30000  -300.00~300.00Hz
0492H
Given speed -30000~30000  -300.00~300.00Hz
0493H
Given speed filtering value
0494H
Output voltage effective value
0495H
Output current effective value
0496H
Output torque -1000~1000  -100.0%~100.0% inverter rated current
0497H
Driver efficiency
0498H
Bus voltage
0499H
Analog input AI0/TM motor temperature detection input -10000~10000-10.000~10.000V
049AH
Analog input AI1
049BH
Analog input AI2 (reserved)
049CH
System time
049DH
Radiator temperature
049EH
Phase U voltage (instantaneous value)
049FH
Phase V voltage (instantaneous value)
0490H
Phase W voltage (instantaneous value)
04A1H
Phase U current (instantaneous value)
04A 2H
Phase V current (instantaneous value)
04A 3H
Phase W current (instantaneous value)
04A 4H
Output active power
04A 5H
Total output power
04A 6H
Reactive power
04A 7H
Power factor
04A 8H
Feedback speed (rpm) -9999~9999-999.9~999.9
04A 9H
Pre-torque
04AAH~04B9H
-10000~10000-10.000~10.000V
Reserve 16 units
Modbus Communication Protocol
View[0~31]: The specific monitoring contents are related to the inverter model. Please refer
to “select LCD display data content” in the Inverter Instructions.
04BAH: View[0]//no-definition
04BBH: View[1]
04BAH~04D9H
04BCH: View[2]
04BDH: View[3]
04BEH: View[4]
04BFH: View[5]
04C0H: View[6]
206
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
04C1H: View[7]
04C2H: View[8]
04C3H: View[9]
04C4H: View[10]
04C5H: View[11]
04C6H: View[12]
04C7H: View[13]
04C8H: View[14]
04C9H: View[15]
04CAH: View[16]
04CBH: View[17]
04CCH: View[18]
04CDH: View[19]
04CEH: View[20]
04CFH: View[21]
04D0H: View[22]
04D1H: View[23]
04D2H: View[24]
04D3H: View[25]
04D4H: View[26]
04D5H: View[27]
04D6H: View[28]
04D7H: View[29]
04D8H: View[30]
04D9H: View[31]
Uxx monitoring data (curve data)
04DAH: U01 data value (curve 1)
04DBH: U02 data value (curve 2)
04DCH: U03 data value (curve 3)
04DEH: U05 data value (curve 5)
04DFH: U06 data value (curve 6)
04E0H: U07 data value (curve 7)
04DAH~04E5H
04E1H: U08 data value (curve 8)
configuration)
04E3H: low byte: U03 logo (curve 3 configuration); high byte: U04 logo (curve 4
configuration)
04E4H: low byte: U05 logo (curve 5 configuration); high byte: U06 logo (curve 6
configuration)
04E5H: low byte: U07 logo (curve 7 configuration); high byte: U08 logo (curve 8
configuration)
Reserve 4 units (for the driver)
207
Modbus Communication Protocol
04E2H: low byte: U01 logo (curve 1 configuration); high byte: U02 logo (curve 2
04E6H~04E9H
Appendix C
04DDH: U04 data value (curve 4)
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
04EAH~05E9H
Phase U current (buffer 256 points, for graphical display) [take sample once every 10 PWM
periods]
05EAH~06E9H
Phase V current (buffer 256 points, for graphical display)
06EAH~07E9H
Phase W current (buffer 256 points, for graphical display)
07EAH
Output torque (for graphical display)
07EBH
Given speed (for graphical display)
07ECH
Feedback speed (for graphical display)
07EDH
Bus voltage (for graphical display)
07EEH~09EDH
Reserve 512 spaces (for graphical display)
Fault code
0A34H~0A38H
Historical
Actual speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
fault 0
Given speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
(the earliest)
Bus voltage at faulty moment
Current at faulty moment
Fault code
0A39H~0A3DH
Historical
fault 1
Actual speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Given speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Bus voltage at faulty moment
Current at faulty moment
Function code
0A3EH~0A42H
Historical
fault 2
Actual speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Given speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Bus voltage at faulty moment
Current at faulty moment
Function code
0A43H~0A47H
Historical
fault 3
Actual speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Given speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Bus voltage at faulty moment
Appendix C
Current at faulty moment
Function code
0A48H~0A4CH
Historical
fault 4
Actual speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Given speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Bus voltage at faulty moment
Current at faulty moment
Modbus Communication Protocol
Function code
0A4DH~0A51H
Historical
fault 5
Actual speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Given speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Bus voltage at faulty moment
Current at faulty moment
Function code
0A52H~0A56H
Historical
Actual speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
fault 6
Given speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
Bus voltage at faulty moment
208
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Current at faulty moment
Function code
0A57H~0A5BH
Historical
Actual speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
fault 7
Given speed at faulty moment -30000~30000-300.00~300.00Hz
(the latest)
Bus voltage at faulty moment
Current at faulty moment
Appendix C
Modbus Communication Protocol
209
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Appendix D Customer Complaint
Customer Name:
Tel:
Complaint Category: □Marketing
Fax:
□Publicity □Service
□Quality □Business
□Product
□Others
Complaints:
The Complainant (Signature):
Complaints Unit(Official Seal):
Date:
211
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Appendix E Product Warranty Card
Customer Name:
Tel:
Fax:
Warranty Product:
Warranty Content:
Warranty Person(Signature):
Warranty Unit(OfficialSeal):
Date:
213
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
Warranty Agreement
1. Warranty period of the product is 18 months (bar code information on the inverter shall prevail).
During the warranty, if the product has any fault or damage during its normal use according to the
operation instruction, the company will provide free repair.
2. During the warranty, if the product is damaged due to one of the following reasons, a certain
maintenance fee will be charged:
A. Machine damage due to improper use and arbitrary repair or modification;
B. Machine damage due to fire, flood, abnormal voltage, other natural disaster and secondary
disaster;
C. Hardware damage due to artificial fall and transportation after purchase;
D. Machine damage caused by improper operation not following the user manual provided by
the company;
E. Fault and damage caused by the obstacle other than the machine (such as external
equipment factor);
3. When the product has any fault or damage, please correctly fill in the Product Warranty Card in
details.
4. Collection of maintenance fee will be based on the latest Maintenance Price List.
5. Typically the warranty card won’t be reissued, please be sure to reserve it and show it to the
maintenance personnel during warranty.
6. If you have any problem during service, please timely contact our agent or the company.
7. Power of interpretation of the agreement shall be owned by Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric
Co., Ltd.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
(Customer service center) service hotline: 400-821-0325
Address: 1560# Siyi road, Jiading district, Shanghai
Postcode: 201801
Tel.: 021-69926000
Fax: 021-69926000
Website: http://www.stepelectric.com
214
AS180 Series High-Performance V/F Inverter Instruction Manual
Notice to Customers
Dear customers:
RoHS is the abbreviation for the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in
electrical and electronic equipment which was implemented by EU on July 1st, 2006. It stipulates that
in the newly developed electrical and electronic equipment, the following six hazardous substances
are restricted: lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chrome, PBB and PBDE.
In China, the Electronic Information Products Pollution Control Management Measures was
issued on February 28th, 2006 jointly by the Ministry of Information Industry, State Development and
Reform Commission, Ministry of Commerce, General State Administration for Industry and
Commerce, Administration of Customs of the P.R.C, General Administration of Quality Supervision,
Inspection and Quarantine and State Bureau of Environmental Protection, became a RoHS direction of
Chinese Version and was enforced. On February 1st, 2008, electronic waste environmental pollution
prevention and control management measures issued by the State Bureau of Environmental Protection
of the P.R.C began to be executed, clearly specifying that the users of electronic and electrical products
shall provide or entrust the electronic waste to be disassembled and disposed by the qualified company
(including small individual businesses) with corresponding business scope listed in directory (or
temporary directory).
All electronic components, PCB filters, wire straps, structural parts used in our products are
selected and purchased by following the Electronic Information Products Pollution Control
Management Measures and RoHS directive. The six hazardous substances (lead, mercury, cadmium,
hexavalent chrome, PBB and PBDE), are strictly controlled. During manufacturing PCB components
are welded on a XinChi lead free welding production line with a lead free welding technology.
Hazardous substances may be contained in the following assemblies:
Type of assembly
Possible hazardous
substances
Electronic
components
PCB Board
Metal sheet
Radiator
Plastic piece
Conductor
Six hazardous substances: lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chrome, PBB and PBDE
1) Environment analysis: Our electronic products will produce some heat in operation, which
may lead the spread of little amount of hazardous substances. It will not cause any serious
consequence for ambient environment. Once the life cycle of those electronic products is end and the
product is discarded, the heavy metal and chemical hazardous substances contained in the products
may seriously contaminate the soil and water resource.
2) Life cycle of electronic products and devices: Any electronic products and devices has its life
215
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
cycle and will be discarded, replaced and upgraded by a new product, even it is still functional. The
life cycle of our company electronic products is generally not more than 20 years.
3) Electronic products discard treatment: If the discarded electronic products aren’t treated
properly, it may contaminate the environment. Our customers are required to follow up the related
national regulation and set up a reclaiming system. It can’t be discarded as a regular household refuse
or solid industrial wastes. The discarded products shall be stored in an environment-friendly way, or
reclaimed by qualified company, and should be strictly complied with the electronic waste
environmental pollution prevention and control management measures issued by the State Bureau of
Environmental Protection of the P.R.C. Any unqualified individual or company is prohibited in
disassembling, utilizing, disposing of electronic wastes.
Please don’t throw away the electronic waste together with your ordinary domestic waste. Please
call local waste disposing agencies or environment protection agencies for the advice of proper
electronic waste handling.
Shanghai Sigriner STEP Electric Co., Ltd
216
Download PDF
Similar pages